Full download ebook at ebookname.com
BCOM 3 Business Communication 3rd Edition Carol M.
Lehman
https://ebookname.com/product/bcom-3-business-
communication-3rd-edition-carol-m-lehman/
OR CLICK BUTTON
DOWLOAD NOW
Download more ebook from https://ebookname.com
More products digital (pdf, epub, mobi) instant
download maybe you interests ...
Buruli Ulcer Linda Lehman
https://ebookname.com/product/buruli-ulcer-linda-lehman/
The Responsible Business Reimagining Sustainability and
Success 1st Edition Carol Sanford
https://ebookname.com/product/the-responsible-business-
reimagining-sustainability-and-success-1st-edition-carol-sanford/
Chemistry of High Energy Materials 3 ed 3rd Edition
Klapötke Thomas M.
https://ebookname.com/product/chemistry-of-high-energy-
materials-3-ed-3rd-edition-klapotke-thomas-m/
Effective Business Communication in Organisations
Preparing Messages that Communicate 4th Edition
Fielding M L Du Plooy-Cilliers F
https://ebookname.com/product/effective-business-communication-
in-organisations-preparing-messages-that-communicate-4th-edition-
fielding-m-l-du-plooy-cilliers-f/
Foundations of Legal Research and Writing Carol M. Bast
https://ebookname.com/product/foundations-of-legal-research-and-
writing-carol-m-bast/
Communication Skills 3rd Edition Infobase Publishing
https://ebookname.com/product/communication-skills-3rd-edition-
infobase-publishing/
Essentials of Business Communication Seventh Edition
Mary Ellen Guffey
https://ebookname.com/product/essentials-of-business-
communication-seventh-edition-mary-ellen-guffey/
Business Communication Process Product Seventh Edition
Mary Ellen Guffey
https://ebookname.com/product/business-communication-process-
product-seventh-edition-mary-ellen-guffey/
An Introduction to Political Communication 3rd Edition
Communication and Society Brian Mcnair
https://ebookname.com/product/an-introduction-to-political-
communication-3rd-edition-communication-and-society-brian-mcnair/
This is an electronic version of the print textbook. Due to electronic rights
restrictions, some third party content may be suppressed. Editorial
review has deemed that any suppres ed content does not materially
affect the overall learning experience. The publisher reserves the
right to remove content from this title at any time if subsequent
rights restrictions require it. For valuable information on pricing, previous
editions, changes to current editions, and alternate formats, please visit
www.cengage.com/highered to search by ISBN#, author, title, or keyword
for materials in your areas of interest.
s
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
reviewcard/
© 2012 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
C H A P T E R 1
E S TA B L I S H I N G A F R A M E W O R K
F O R B U S I N E S S C O M M U N I C AT I O N
Key Terms
Chronemics the study of how a culture
perceives time and its use
Decoding the process of interpreting a
message
Diversity skills the ability to communi-
cate effectively with both men and women of
all ages, cultures, and minority groups
Downward communication a type of
communication that flows from supervisor to
employee, from policy makers to operating
personnel, or from top to bottom on the
organization chart
Encoding the process of selecting and
organizing a message
Ethics the principles of right and wrong that
guide one in making decisions that consider
the impact of one’s actions on others as well
as on the decision maker
Ethnocentrism the assumption that one’s
own cultural norms are the right way to do
things
External messages messages directed to
recipients outside the organization
Feedback a receiver’s response to a
sender’s message
Formal communication channel
a channel of communication typified by the
formal organization chart; dictated by the
technical, political, and economic environ-
ment of the organization
Grapevine the best-known component of
the informal communication system
Horizontal (or lateral) communica-
tion interactions between organizational
units on the same hierarchical level
Informal communication channel
a channel of communication that continu-
ously develops as people interact within the
formal system to accommodate their social
and psychological needs
Interferences also called barriers; numer-
ous factors that hinder the communication
process
Internal messages messages intended
for recipients within the organization
Kinesics the study of body language, which
is not universal, but instead is learned from
one’s culture
Organizational communication the
movement of information within the com-
pany structure
Learning Objectives
LO1
: Define communication and describe the value of communication in
business.
Communication is the process of exchanging information and meaning between or among
individuals through a common system of symbols, signs, and behavior. Managers spend
most of their time in communication activities.
LO2
: Explain the communication process model and the ultimate objective of
the communication process.
People engaged in
communication encode and
decode messages while
simultaneously serving as
both senders and receivers.
In the communication
process, feedback helps
people resolve possible
misunderstandings and thus
improves communication
effectiveness. Feedback and
the opportunity to observe
nonverbal signs are always
present in face-to-face
communication, the most
complete of the three communication levels.
LO3
: Discusshowinformationflowsinanorganization.
Both formal
and informal
communication
systems exist in
every organization;
the formal system
exists to accomplish
tasks, and the
informal system
serves a personal
maintenance
purpose that
results in people
feeling better
about themselves
and others.
Communication flows
upward, downward,
and horizontally or laterally. These flows often defy formal graphic description, yet each is
a necessary part of the overall communication activity of the organization. Communication
takes place at five levels: intrapersonal (communication within one person), interpersonal
(communication between two people), group (communication among more than two
people), organizational (communication among combinations of groups), and public
(communication from one entity to the greater public).
S E N D E R
R E C E I V E R
Encodes
Message
Encodes
Message
Decodes
Message
Decodes
Message
Selects Channel &
Transmits Message
Selects Channel &
Transmits Message
I
N
T
E
R
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
S
s
UPWARD COMMUNICATION
Progress reports (spoken and written)
• Results/accomplishments
• Problems/clarifications
UPWARD COMMUNICATION
Ideas/suggestions
Feelings/attitudes
HORIZONTAL OR
LATERAL COMMUNICATION
Coordination of interrelated activities
Problem-solving efforts
DOWNWARD COMMUNICATION
Policies and procedures
Organizational goals and strategies
Work assignments
Employee development
• Job role/responsibility
• Performance appraisal
(formal and informal)
• Constructive criticism
• Deserved praise and recognition
© 2012 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
BCOM3_SE cards.indd 3 12/27/10 2:08:50 PM
M o r e r e v i e w t o o l s a t C o u r s e M a t e f o r B C O M 3 . L o g i n a t w w w . c e n g a g e b r a i n . c o m .
Proxemics the study of cultural space
requirements
Stakeholders people inside and outside
the organization who are affected by
decisions
Stereotypes mental pictures that one
group forms of the main characteristics of
another group, creating preformed ideas of
what people in this group are like
Synergy a situation in which the whole is
greater than the sum of the parts
Team a small number of people with
complementary skills who work together for
a common purpose
Telecommuting also called teleworking;
working at home or other remote locations
and sending and receiving work from the
company office electronically
Upward communication a type of com-
munication that is generally a response to
requests from supervisors
LO4
: Explain how legal and ethical constraints, diversity challenges, changing
technology, and team environment act as strategic forces that influence
the process of business communication.
Communication occurs within an environment constrained by legal and ethical
requirements, diversity challenges, changing technology, and team environment
requirements.
• International, federal, state, and local laws impose legal boundaries for business
activity, and ethical boundaries are determined by personal analysis that can be
assisted by application of various frameworks for decision making.
• Communication is critically impacted by diversity in nationality, culture, age, gender,
and other factors that offer tremendous opportunities to maximize talent, ideas, and
productivity but pose significant challenges in interpretation of time, personal space
requirements, body language, and language translation.
• Significant strides have occurred in the development of tools for data collection and
analysis, creation of messages that are clearer and more effective, and quick and easy
communication with audiences in remote locations. The use of technology, however,
poses legal and ethical concerns in regard to ownership, access, and privacy.
• Team environment challenges arise because communication in teams differs from
communication in traditional organizational structures. The result of effective teams is
better decisions, more creative solutions to problems, and higher worker morale.
1.
You
must
learn
to
design
spreadsheets
that
make
financial
information
meaningful
to
users.
2.
Many
online
tools
are
available
that
build
relationships
with
customers.
3.
I
am
submitting
an
employee
testimonial,
which
I
first
posted
to
a
presentations
blog,
to
the
company
website.
4.
More
companies
are
videoconferencing
because
of
the
need
to
reduce
travel
costs
significantly.
5.
You
must
perform
periodic
maintenance
on
your
computer
to
keep
it
operating
efficiently.
6.
Planned
store
improvements
include
widening
the
aisles,
improving
lighting,
and
lowering
shelves
for
a
sophisticated
feel.
or
Planned
store
improvements
include
widened
aisles,
improved
lighting,
and
lowered
shelves
for
a
sophisticated
feel.
Grammar Quiz
Sentence Structure
Identify the weakness in each sentence and write an improved version.
1. It is essential that you learn to design spreadsheets that make financial information
meaningful to users.
2. There are many online tools available that build relationships with customers.
3. I am submitting an employee testimonial to the company website, which I first posted
to a presentation blog.
4. More companies are videoconferencing because of the need to significantly reduce
travel costs.
5. To operate efficiently, you must perform periodic maintenance on your computer.
6. Planned store improvements include widening the aisles, improved lighting, and lower
shelves for a sophisticated feel.
Grammar Quiz Solutions
Chapter In Review Cards in
the back of the Student Edition
provide students a portable study
tool containing all of the pertinent
information for class preparation.
Engaging. Trackable. Affordable.
CourseMate brings course concepts to life with interactive learning,
study, and exam preparation tools that support BCOM3.
FOR STUDENTS:
• Interactive eBook
• Chapter Quizzes
• Assignments & Handouts
• E-Lectures
• Cases
• Chapter In Review Cards
• Flashcards (electronic & printable)
• Games (crossword puzzles & quiz bowl)
• Glossary
• Learning Objectives
• PowerPoint®
• Videos
• Grammar Games
• Style Guides
• Templates
• Model Documents
• Language Review Quizzes
FOR INSTRUCTORS:
• First Day of Class
Instructions
• Custom Options through
4LTR+ Program
• Instructor’s Manual
• Test Bank
• PowerPoint®
Slides
• Instructor Prep Cards
• Engagement Tracker
S T U D E N T T E S T E D , F A C U L T Y A P P R O V E D
THE
SOLUTION
ONLINE RESOURCES INCLUDED!
Students sign in at
www.cengagebrain.com
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd i
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd i 1/4/11 11:44:09 AM
1/4/11 11:44:09 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
BCOM3 2011–2012 Edition
Carol M. Lehman
Debbie D. DuFrene
Vice President of Editorial, Business:
Jack W. Calhoun
Editor-in-Chief: Melissa Acuña
Acquisitions Editor: Erin Joyner
Developmental Editor: Dana Freeman,
B-books, Ltd.
Product Developmental Manager,
4LTR Press: Steven E. Joos
Executive Brand Marketing Manager,
4LTR Press: Robin Lucas
Editorial Assistant: Kayti Purkiss
VP/Director of Marketing: Cheryl Costantini
Marketing Manager: Michelle Lockard
Marketing Coordinator: Leigh Smith
Sr. Marketing Communications Manager:
Sarah Greber
Production Director: Amy McGuire,
B-books, Ltd.
Content Project Manager: Darrell Frye
Media Editor: John Rich
Frontlist Buyer, Manufacturing:
Miranda Klapper
Production Service: B-books, Ltd.
Art Director: Stacy Jenkins Shirley
Internal Designer: KeDesign, Mason, OH
Cover Designer: KeDesign, Mason, OH
Cover Image: © Getty Images/Blend
Images/Anderson Ross
Photo Rights Acquisitions Specialist:
Deanna Ettinger
Photo Researcher: Charlotte Goldman
© 2012, © 2011 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the copyright
herein may be reproduced, transmitted, stored, or used in any form or by
any means graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including but not limited to
photocopying, recording, scanning, digitizing, taping, web distribution, infor-
mation networks, or information storage and retrieval systems, except as
permitted under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act,
without the prior written permission of the publisher.
For product information and technology assistance, contact us at
Cengage Learning Customer & Sales Support, 1-800-354-9706
For permission to use material from this text or product,
submit all requests online at www.cengage.com/permissions
Further permissions questions can be emailed to
permissionrequest@cengage.com
Library of Congress Control Number: 2010942121
SE ISBN-13: 978-1-111-52777-8
SE ISBN-10: 1-111-52777-6
South-Western
5191 Natorp Boulevard
Mason, OH 45040
USA
Cengage Learning products are represented in Canada by
Nelson Education, Ltd.
For your course and learning solutions, visit www.cengage.com
Purchase any of our products at your local college store or at our
preferred online store www.CengageBrain.com
Printed in the United States of America
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15 14 13 12 11
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd ii
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd ii 1/4/11 11:44:19 AM
1/4/11 11:44:19 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
iii
Communication Foundations 2
1 Establishing a Framework for Business
Communication 2
2 Focusing on Interpersonal and Group
Communication 20
Communication Analysis 36
3 Planning Spoken and Written Messages 36
4 Preparing Spoken and Written Messages 56
Communication Through Voice,
Electronic, and Written Messages 70
5 Communicating Electronically 70
6 Delivering Good- and Neutral-News
Messages 84
7 Delivering Bad-News Messages 102
8 Delivering Persuasive Messages 122
Communication Through Reports and
Business Presentations 140
9 Understanding the Report Process
and Research Methods 140
10 Managing Data and Using Graphics 160
11 Organizing and Preparing Reports
and Proposals 172
12 Designing and Delivering Business
Presentations 194
Communication for Employment 216
13 Preparing Résumés and Application
Messages 216
14 Interviewing for a Job and Preparing
Employment Messages 244
GRAMMAR AND USAGE APPENDIX 260
REFERENCES 275
INDEX 278
Brief Contents
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd iii
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd iii 1/4/11 11:44:24 AM
1/4/11 11:44:24 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Contents
Part 1 Communication
Foundations 2
1 Establishing a Framework for
Business Communication 2
Value of Communication 2
The Communication Process 3
The Sender Encodes the Message 4
The Sender Selects the Channel and Transmits the Message 4
The Receiver Decodes the Message 4
The Receiver Encodes the Message to Clarify 5
Interferences Hinder the Process 5
Communicating within Organizations 5
Communication Flow in Organizations 5
Levels of Communication 9
Strategic Forces Influencing Business
Communication 10
Strategic Force 1: Legal and Ethical Constraints 10
Strategic Force 2: Diversity Challenges 13
Strategic Force 3: Changing Technology 15
Strategic Force 4: Team Environment 17
2 Focusing on Interpersonal
and Group Communication 20
Behavioral Theories that Impact Communication 20
Recognizing Human Needs 20
Stroking 22
Exploring the Johari Window 22
Contrasting Management Styles 23
Nonverbal Communication 23
Metacommunication 23
Kinesic Messages 23
Understanding Nonverbal Messages 24
Listening as a Communication
Skill 25
Listening for a Specific Purpose 25
Bad Listening Habits 26
Group Communication 27
Increasing Focus on Groups 27
Characteristics of Effective Groups 29
Group Roles 30
From Groups to Teams 31
Meeting Management 32
Face-to-Face Meetings 33
Electronic Meetings 33
Suggestions for Effective Meetings 34
Part 2 Communication
Analysis 36
3 Planning Spoken and
Written Messages 36
Step 1: Determining the Purpose and Channel 38
Step 2: Envisioning the Audience 38
Step 3: Adapting the Message to the Audience 40
Focus on the Receiver’s Point of View 40
Communicate Ethically and Responsibly 41
Build and Protect Goodwill 43
Use Contemporary Language 47
Use Simple, Informal Words 47
Communicate Concisely 48
Project a Positive,TactfulTone 49
Step 4: Organizing the Message 52
Outline to Benefit the Sender and the
Receiver 52
Sequence Ideas to Achieve Desired
Goals 52
4 Preparing
Spoken and Written
Messages 56
Prepare the First Draft 56
Craft Powerful Sentences 58
Develop Coherent Paragraphs 60
Revise and Proofread 62
Improve Readability 62
Apply Visual Enhancements to Improve Readability 63
Use Systematic Procedures for Revising and Proofreading 66
Cultivate a Frame of Mind for Effective Revising and
Proofreading 68
on
se 25
27
ups 29
y 41
C o n t e n t s
iv
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd iv
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd iv 1/4/11 11:44:35 AM
1/4/11 11:44:35 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
v
C o n t e n t s
Part 3 Communication
Through Voice, Electronic,
and Written Messages 70
5 Communicating
Electronically 70
Electronic Mail
Communication 70
Advantages of Email 70
Guidelines for Preparing
Email Messages 71
Effective Use of Email 72
Instant Messaging 74
Text Messaging 75
Electronic Messages and the Law 77
Web Page Communication 78
Writing for a Website 78
Writing Wikis 79
Writing for Weblogs 79
Voice and Wireless Communication 80
Voice Mail Communication 80
Cell Phone Communication 81
Wireless Communication and the Future 82
Appropriate Use of Technology 82
Determine the Purpose of the Message 83
Determine Whether the Information Is Personal or
Confidential 83
Decide Whether Positive Human Relations Are Sacrificed 83
6 Delivering Good- and
Neutral-News Messages 84
Deductive Organizational Pattern 84
Good-News Messages 86
Positive News 86
Thank-You and Appreciation Messages 88
Routine Claims 90
Claim Message 90
Favorable Response to a Claim Message 90
Routine Requests 93
Routine Request 93
Favorable Response to a
Routine Request 93
Positive Response to a
Favor Request 93
Form Messages
for Routine
Responses 95
Routine Messages about Orders and Credit 95
Acknowledging Customer Orders 97
Providing Credit Information 97
Extending Credit 98
Procedural Messages 100
7 Delivering Bad-News
Messages 102
Choosing an Appropriate
Channel and Organizational
Pattern 102
Channel Choice and Commitment
to Tact 102
Use of the Inductive Approach to
Build Goodwill 104
Exceptions to the Inductive
Approach 105
Developing a Bad-News
Message 105
Writing the Introductory Paragraph 105
Presenting the Facts, Analysis, and Reasons 106
Writing the Bad-News Statement 107
Offering a Counterproposal or“Silver Lining”Idea 108
Closing Positively 108
Refusing a Request 110
Denying a Claim 111
Denying Credit 113
Delivering Constructive Criticism 115
Communicating Negative Organizational News 116
Breaking Bad News 116
Responding to Crisis Situations 118
8 Delivering Persuasive
Messages 122
Persuasion Strategies 122
Plan Before You Write 123
Use the Inductive Approach 124
Apply Sound Writing Principles 124
Sales Messages 126
Gain Attention 126
Generate Interest by Introducing the
Product, Service, or Idea 127
Create Desire by Providing
Convincing Evidence 128
Motivate Action 131
Persuasive Requests 132
Making a Claim 132
Asking a Favor 135
Requesting Information 137
Persuading within an Organization 137
0
2
d the Law 77
ional
tment
ch to
2
h 124
iples 124
ducing the
ea 127
128
37
nization 137
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd v
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd v 1/4/11 11:44:39 AM
1/4/11 11:44:39 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
C o n t e n t s
vi
Part 4 Communication
Through Reports
and Business
Presentations 140
9 Understanding the Report
Process and Research
Methods 140
Characteristics of Reports 140
Types of Reports 141
Proposals 143
Basis for Reports: The Problem-Solving Process 143
Recognizing and Defining the Problem 143
Selecting a Method of Solution 145
Collecting and Organizing the Data 149
Arriving at an Answer 155
10 Managing Data and Using
Graphics 160
Communicating
Quantitative
Information 160
Using Graphics 162
Effective and Ethical Use of
Graphics 163
Types of Graphic Aids 163
Including Graphics in Texts 170
Positioning Graphics in Texts 170
11 Organizing and
Preparing Reports and
Proposals 172
Parts of a Formal Report 172
Preliminary Parts of a Report 173
Report Text 176
Report Addenda 177
Organization of Formal Reports 177
Writing Convincing and Effective Reports 178
Choosing a Writing Style for Formal Reports 180
Short Reports 182
Memorandum, Email, and Letter Reports 182
Form Reports 182
Proposals 189
Proposal Structure 189
Proposal Preparation 191
12 Designing and Delivering
Business Presentations 194
Planning an Effective Business Presentation 194
Identify Your Purpose 195
Know Your Audience 196
Organizing the Content 197
Introduction 197
Body 199
Closing 200
Designing Compelling Presentation Visuals 200
Types of Presentation Visuals 200
Design of Presentation Visuals 202
Design Tips for Audience Handouts and
Notes Pages 203
Refining Your Delivery 204
Delivery Method 204
Vocal Qualities 205
Delivery Style 207
Adapting to Alternate Delivery
Situations 210
Culturally Diverse Audiences 210
Team Presentations 212
Distance Presentations 213
Part 5 Communication for
Employment 216
13 Preparing Résumés and
Application Messages 216
Preparing for the Job Search 216
Gathering Essential Information 217
Identifying Potential Career
Opportunities 218
Planning a Targeted
Résumé 221
Standard Parts of a
Résumé 221
Types of Résumés 226
Preparing Résumés for
Print and Electronic
Deliveries 227
Preparing a Print
(Designed)
Résumé 227
Preparing Electronic Résumé Submissions 228
Supplementing a Résumé 234
Professional Portfolios 234
Employment Videos 234
P
Su
ation for
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd vi
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd vi 1/4/11 11:44:44 AM
1/4/11 11:44:44 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Composing Application Messages 237
Persuasive Organization 237
General Writing Guidelines 241
Finishing Touches 242
14
Interviewing
for a Job and
Preparing
Employment
Messages 244
Understanding Types of Employment
Interviews 244
Structured Interviews 244
Unstructured Interviews 246
Stress Interviews 246
Group Interviews 246
Virtual Interviews 246
Preparing for an Interview 247
Research the Company 247
Study Yourself 248
Plan Your Appearance 248
Plan Your Time and Materials 249
Practice 249
Conducting a Successful Interview 249
The Opening Formalities 249
The Information Exchange 250
The Closing 253
Preparing Other Employment Messages 255
Application Forms 255
Follow-Up Messages 255
Thank-You Messages 256
Job-Acceptance Messages 256
Job-Refusal Messages 256
Resignation Messages 258
Recommendation Requests 258
GRAMMAR AND USAGE APPENDIX 260
REFERENCES 275
INDEX 278
ges 237
Empl
pl
pl
ploy
oy
oy
oy
oy
o me
me
me
ent
St
Pl
Pl
Pr
C
C o n t e n t s 1
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd 1
27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd 1 1/4/11 11:44:50 AM
1/4/11 11:44:50 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
2 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
Value of Communication
W
e communicate to satisfy needs
in both our work and private
lives. Each of us wants to be
heard, appreciated, and wanted.
We also want to accomplish tasks
and achieve goals. A major value
of communication is to
help people feel good
about themselves and
about their organiza-
tions. Generally peo-
ple communicate for
three basic purposes:
to inform, to persuade,
and to entertain.
What is communication? Communication is the pro-
cess of exchanging information and meaning between or
among individuals through a common system of sym-
bols, signs, and behavior. Other words used to describe
the communication process include conversing, speaking,
corresponding, writing, and listening. Studies indicate that
managers typically spend 60 to 80 percent of their time
involved in communication. In your career activities, you
will communicate in a wide variety of ways, including
• attending meetings and writing reports related to
strategic plans and company policy.
• presenting information to large and small groups in
face-to-face and virtual environments.
• explaining and clarifying management procedures
and work assignments.
• coordinating the work of various employees, depart-
ments, and other work groups.
• evaluating and counseling employees.
• promoting the company’s products/services and image.
O
B
J
E
C
T
I
V
E
S 1 Define communication
and describe the value of
communication in business.
2 Explain the communication
process model and the ultimate
objective of the communication
process.
3 Discuss how information flows in
an organization.
4 Explain how legal and ethical
constraints, diversity challenges,
changing technology, and team
environment act as strategic
forces that influence the process
of business communication.
BCOM
Communication Foundations
Part 1 Chapter 1
Establishing a
Framework for Business
Communication
O B J E C T I V E 1
Define communication
and describe the value
of communication in
business.
©
iStockphoto.com/Alexandr
Tovstenko
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 2
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 2 1/3/11 8:00:12 AM
1/3/11 8:00:12 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
3
C h a p t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n
C H A P T E R
The Communication
Process
E
ffective business communication is essen-
tial to success in today’s work environ-
ments. Recent surveys of executives
document that abilities in writing and
speaking are major determinants of career
success in many fields.1
Though essential
to personal and professional success, effective business
communication does not occur automatically. Your
own experiences likely have taught you that a mes-
sage is not interpreted
correctly just because
you transmitted it. An
effective communica-
tor anticipates pos-
sible breakdowns in
the communication
process—the unlim-
ited ways the message
can be misunderstood. This mind-set provides the con-
centration to design the initial message effectively and
to be prepared to intervene at the appropriate time to
ensure that the message received is on target.
1
©
Roger
Wright/Stone/Getty
Images
O B J E C T I V E 2
Explain the
communication process
model and the ultimate
objective of the
communication process.
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 3
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 3 1/3/11 8:00:18 AM
1/3/11 8:00:18 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
4 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
Consider the communication process model pre-
sented in Figure 1-1. These seemingly simple steps actu-
ally represent a very complex process.
The Sender Encodes the Message
The sender carefully designs a message by selecting
(1) words that clearly convey the message and (2) non-
verbal signals (gestures, posture, facial expression, and
so on) that reinforce the verbal message. The process of
selecting and organizing the message is referred to as
encoding. The sender’s primary objective is to encode
the message in such a way that the message received is
the same (or as close as possible) as the message sent.
Knowledge of the receiver’s educational level, experi-
ence, viewpoints, and other information aids the sender
in encoding the message. If information about the
receiver is unavailable, the sender can use empathy for
the receiver’s position to gain fairly accurate insights to
help in encoding the message.
The Sender Selects the Channel
and Transmits the Message
To increase the likeli-
hood that the receiver will
understand the message,
the sender carefully selects
an appropriate channel for
transmitting the message.
Three typical communication channels are two-way,
face-to-face; two-way, not face-to-face; and one-way,
not face-to-face.
Selecting an inappropriate channel can cause the
message to be misunderstood and can adversely affect
human relations with the receiver. For example, for a
complex subject, a sender might begin with a written
document and follow up with a face-to-face, phone, or
video conference discussion after the receiver has had
an opportunity to study the document. Written docu-
ments are required when legal matters are involved and
written records must be retained.
The Receiver Decodes the Message
The receiver is the destination of the message. The
receiver’s task is to interpret the sender’s message, both
verbal and nonverbal, with as little distortion as pos-
sible. The process of interpreting the message is referred
to as decoding. Because words and nonverbal signals
have different meanings to different people, countless
problems can occur at this point in the communication
process:
• The sender inadequately encodes the original mes-
sage with words not present in the receiver’s vocabu-
lary, ambiguous or nonspecific ideas, or nonverbal
signals that distract the receiver or contradict the
verbal message.
• The receiver is intimidated by the position or author-
ity of the sender, resulting in tension that prevents
effective concentration on the
message and failure to ask for
needed clarification.
• The receiver prejudges the
topic as too boring or dif-
ficult to understand and does
not attempt to understand the
message.
• The receiver is close-minded
and unreceptive to new and
different ideas.
With the infinite number
of breakdowns possible at each
stage of the communication pro-
cess, it is indeed a miracle that
effective communication ever
occurs. The complexity of the
communication process ampli-
fies the importance of the next
stage in the communication
process—feedback to clarify
misunderstandings.
encoding
the process of selecting and
organizing a message
decoding
the process of interpreting a
message
Figure 1-1 The Communication Process Model
S E N D E R
R E C E I V E R
Encodes
Message
Encodes
Message
Decodes
Message
Decodes
Message
Selects Channel &
Transmits Message
Selects Channel &
Transmits Message
I
N
T
E
R
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
S
© Cengage Learning 2010
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 4
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 4 1/3/11 8:00:21 AM
1/3/11 8:00:21 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
5
C h a p t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n
The Receiver Encodes
the Message to Clarify
When the receiver responds to the sender’s message, the
response is called feedback. The feedback might prompt
the sender to modify or adjust the original message to
make it clearer to the receiver. Feedback can be verbal or
nonverbal. A remark such as “Could you clarify . . .” or a
perplexed facial expression provides clear feedback to the
sender that the receiver does not yet understand the mes-
sage.Conversely,a confident“Yes,I understand,”and a nod
of the head likely signal understanding or encouragement.
Interferences Hinder the Process
Senders and receivers must learn to deal with the numer-
ous factors that hinder the communication process.These
factors are referred to as interferences or barriers to
effective communication. Previous examples have illus-
trated some of the interferences that might occur at vari-
ous stages of the communication process. For example,
• differences in educational level, experience, cul-
ture, and other characteristics of the sender and the
receiver increase the complexity of encoding and
decoding a message.
• physical interferences occurring in the channel
include a noisy environment, interruptions, and
uncomfortable surroundings.
• mental distractions, such as preoccupation with other
matters and developing a response, rather than listening.
You can surely compile a list of other barriers that
affect your ability to communicate with friends,instructors,
coworkers,supervisors,andothers.Bybeingawareofthem,
you can concentrate on removing these interferences.
Communicating within
Organizations
T
o be successful, organizations must cre-
ate an environment that energizes and
encourages employees to accomplish
tasks by promoting genuine open-
ness and effective communication.
Organizational communication is con-
cerned with the move-
ment of information
within the company
structure. Regardless
of your career or level
within an organiza-
tion, your ability to communicate will affect not only
the success of the organization but also your personal
success and advancement within that organization.
Communication Flow in
Organizations
Communication occurs in a variety of ways within an
organization.Somecommunicationflowsareplannedand
structured;othersarenot.Somecommunicationflowscan
be formally depicted, whereas some defy description.
Formal and Informal Channels
The flow of communication within an organization fol-
lows both formal and informal channels.
• Formal communication channel. This channel is
typified by the formal organization chart, which is
created by management to define individual and
group relationships and to specify lines of responsi-
bility. Essentially, the formal system is dictated by the
technical, political, and economic environment of the
organization. Within this system, people are required
to behave in certain ways simply to get work done.
• Informal communication channel. This channel
continuously develops as people interact within
the formal system to accommodate their social and
psychological needs. Because the informal channel
undergoes continual changes, it cannot be depicted
accurately by any
graphic means.
When employees rely
almost entirely on the for-
mal communication sys-
tem as a guide to behavior,
the system might be iden-
tified as a bureaucracy.
Procedures manuals, job
descriptions, organiza-
tion charts, and other
written materials dictate
the required behavior.
Communication chan-
nels are followed strictly,
and red tape is abundant.
Procedures are generally
followed exactly; terms
such as rules and policies
serve as sufficient rea-
sons for actions. Even the
most formal organiza-
tions, however, cannot
function long before an
O B J E C T I V E 3
Discuss how information
flows in an organization.
feedback
a receiver’s response to a
sender’s message
interferences
also called barriers; numerous
factors that hinder the
communication process
organizational
communication
the movement of information
within the company structure
formal communication
channel
a channel of communication
typified by the formal
organization chart; dictated
by the technical, political, and
economic environment of the
organization
informal
communication
channel
a channel of communication
that continuously develops
as people interact within
the formal system to
accommodate their social and
psychological needs
©
iStockphoto.com/Boris
Yankov
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 5
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 5 1/3/11 8:00:23 AM
1/3/11 8:00:23 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
definite communication channels, the grapevine tends to
develop and operate within all organizations. Consider
these points related to the accuracy and value of grape-
vine communication:
• As a communication channel, the grapevine has a
reputation for being speedy but inaccurate. In the
absence of alarms, the grapevine might be the most
effective way to let occupants know that the building
is on fire. It certainly beats sending an email.
• Although the grapevine often is thought of as a channel
for inaccurate communication, in reality it is no more or
less accurate than other channels. Even formal commu-
nication can become inaccurate and filtered as it passes
from level to level in the organizational hierarchy.
• The inaccuracy of the grapevine has more to do
with the message input than with the output. For
example, the grapevine is noted as a carrier of rumors,
primarily because it carries informal messages. If the
input is a rumor, and nothing more, the output
obviously will be inaccurate. But the output might
be an accurate description of the original rumor.
• In a business office, news about promotions, person-
nel changes, company policy changes, and annual
salary adjustments often is communicated through
the grapevine long before being conveyed through
formal channels. The process works similarly in
colleges, where information about choice instructors
typically is not officially published but is known by
students through the grapevine. How best to prepare
for examinations, instructor attitudes on attendance
and homework, and even faculty personnel changes
are messages that travel over the grapevine.
• A misconception about the grapevine is that the
message passes from person to person until it finally
reaches a person who can’t pass it on—the end of
the line. Actually, the grapevine works as a network
informal communication system emerges. As people
operate within the organized system, they interact on a
person-to-person basis and create an environment con-
ducive to satisfying their personal emotions, prejudices,
likes, and dislikes.
In the college classroom, for example, the student
behavior required to satisfy the formal system is to
attend class, take notes, read the text, complete assign-
ments, and pass exams. On the first day of class, this
behavior is typical of almost all students, particularly if
they did not know one another prior to attending the
class. As the class progresses, however, the informal sys-
tem emerges and overlaps the formal system. Students
become acquainted, sit next to people they particu-
larly like, talk informally, and might even plan ways to
beat the external system by cutting class and borrow-
ing notes, for example. Soon, these behaviors become
norms for class behavior. Students who do not engage
in the informal system might be viewed with disdain
by the others. Obviously, the informal system benefits
people because it is efficient, and it affects the overall
communication of the group in important ways.
The Grapevine as an Informal
Communication System
The grapevine, often called the rumor mill, is perhaps
the best-known component of the informal communica-
tion system. As people talk casually during breaks, text
one another, or chat online, the focus usually shifts from
topic to topic. One of the
usual topics is work—job,
company, supervisor, fellow
employees. Even though
the formal system includes
grapevine
the best-known component of
the informal communication
system
6 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
©
John
Lund/Blend
Images/Jupiterimages
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 6
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 6 1/3/11 8:00:24 AM
1/3/11 8:00:24 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
7
C h a p t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n
channel. Typically, one person tells two or three others,
who each tell two or three others, who each tell two
or three others, and so on. Thus, the message might
spread to a huge number of people in a short time,
especially now that the grapevine has gone hi-tech and
social networking sites have become “gossip central.”
• The grapevine has no single, consistent source.
Messages might originate anywhere and follow vari-
ous routes.
Due at least in part to widespread downsizing and
corporate scandals during the last few years, employ-
ees in many organizations are demanding to be better
informed. Some companies have implemented new for-
mal ways, such as newsletters and intranets, as well as
informal ways, including blogs and Twitter, for sharing
information with their internal constituents. Company
openness with employees about management decisions
and financial issues means conveying more information
through the formal system rather than risking its miscom-
munication through informal channels. Zappos—named
one of the best companies to work for in America—has
become a model for nurturing employees by following
core values of humility, fun and weirdness, and open and
honest communication. Employees, who describe the cul-
ture as “flat-out fun,” are free to be creative and enjoy
free lunches and spending time with managers at numer-
ous zany team gatherings.2
An informal communication system will emerge
from even the most carefully designed formal system.
Managers who ignore this fact are attempting to manage
blindfolded. Instead of denying or condemning the grape-
vine, the effective manager will learn to use the informal
communication network.The grapevine, for instance, can
be useful in counteracting rumors and false information.
Directions for Communication Flow
The direction in which communication flows in an organi-
zation can be downward, upward, or horizontal, as shown
in Figure 1-2. Because these three terms are used frequently
in communication discussions, they deserve clarification.
Although the concept of flow seems simple, direction has
meaning for those participating in the communication
process.
Figure 1-2 Flow of Information within an Organization
UPWARD COMMUNICATION
Progress reports (spoken and written)
• Results/accomplishments
• Problems/clarifications
UPWARD COMMUNICATION
Ideas/suggestions
Feelings/attitudes
HORIZONTAL OR
LATERAL COMMUNICATION
Coordination of interrelated activities
Problem-solving efforts
DOWNWARD COMMUNICATION
Policies and procedures
Organizational goals and strategies
Work assignments
Employee development
• Job role/responsibility
• Performance appraisal
(formal and informal)
• Constructive criticism
• Deserved praise and recognition
Formal Network Flow
© Cengage Learning 2010
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 7
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 7 1/3/11 8:00:25 AM
1/3/11 8:00:25 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
8
Downward
Communication
Downward Communication. Downward communica-
tion flows from supervisor to employee, from policy
makers to operating personnel, or from top to bot-
tom on the organization chart. A simple policy state-
ment from the top of the organization might grow into
a formal plan for operation at lower levels. Teaching
people how to perform their specific tasks is an element
of downward communication. Another ele-
ment is orientation to a company’s rules,
practices, procedures, history, and goals.
Employees learn about the quality of
their job performance through down-
ward communication.
Downward communication nor-
mally involves both written and spoken
methods and makes use of the following
guidelines:
• People at high levels in the
organization usually have
greater knowledge of the
organization and its goals than
do people at lower levels.
• Both spoken and written
messages tend to become larger
as they move downward through
organizational levels. This
expansion results from attempts
to prevent distortion and is more
noticeable in written messages.
• Spoken messages are subject to
greater changes in meaning than
are written messages.
When a supervisor
sends a message to a subor-
dinate employee who then
asks a question or nods
in agreement, the ques-
tion and the nod are signs
of feedback. Feedback can
flow both downward and
upward in organizational
communication through
traditional as well as infor-
mal channels.
Upward Communication.
Upward communication gen-
erally is feedback to downward communication. When
management requests information from lower organiza-
tional levels, the resulting information becomes feedback
to that request. Employees talk to supervisors about them-
selves, their fellow employees, their work and methods of
doing it, and their perceptions of the organization. These
comments are feedback to the downward flow transmit-
ted in both spoken and written form by group meetings,
procedures or operations manuals,company news releases,
the company intranet, and the grapevine.
Although necessary and valuable, upward com-
munication involves risks. The following factors are
important to consider when upward communication
flow is involved:
• Upward communication is
primarily feedback to requests
and actions of supervisors.
• Upward communication can
be misleading because lower-
level employees often tell their
superiors what they think their
superiors want to hear. Therefore,
their messages might contradict
their true observations and
perceptions.
• Upward communication frequently
involves risk to an employee
and is dependent on trust in the
supervisor.
• Employees will reject superficial
attempts by management to
obtain feedback.
When effectively used, upward
communication keeps manage-
ment informed about the feelings
of lower-level employees, taps the
expertise of employees, helps man-
agement identify both difficult and
potentially promotable employees, and
paves the way for even more effective downward com-
munication. Upward communication is key to keeping
employees engaged and informed and is especially critical
in tapping the power of younger employees who expect to
collaborate rather than to be supervised.3
Horizontal Communication. Horizontal, or lateral,
communication describes interactions between orga-
nizational units on the same hierarchical level. These
viso
bor
then
nod
ques
signs
and is dependent
supervisor.
will re
y man
dback.
Wh
When
en
co
comm
mm
me
ent
nt i
of low
owe
pertise
ment i
potentially p
or
r-
n
ds
s-
• Employees
attempts by
obtain feed
W
o
exp
agem
Upward
Communication
P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
©
iStockphoto.com/Pali
Rao
n
people how to perform their
of downward com
ment is orienta
ti
tice
ces,
s, p
p
pro
roc
mpl
p oyee
es
s l
ei
eir
r job
b pe
ward
rd c
com
Do
D w
mally invol
hods and
lines:
• People at high
organization u
ment
prac
ct
t
Em
the
m
meth
guidel ©
iStockphoto.com/Pali
Rao
downward
communication
a type of communication
that flows from supervisor to
employee, from policy makers
to operating personnel, or
from top to bottom on the
organization chart
upward
communication
a type of communication
that is generally a response to
requests from supervisors
horizontal (or lateral)
communication
interactions between
organizational units on the
same hierarchical level
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 8
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 8 1/3/11 8:00:26 AM
1/3/11 8:00:26 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
9
C h a p t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n
interactions reveal one of the major shortcomings of
organizational charts: They do not recognize the role of
horizontal communication when they depict authority
relationships by placing one box higher than another and
define role functions by placing titles in those boxes. Yet
management should realize that horizontal communica-
tion is the primary means of achieving coordination in
a functional organizational structure. Units coordinate
their activities to accomplish task goals just as adjacent
workers in a production line coordinate their activities.
So, for horizontal communication to be maximally effec-
tive, the people in any system or organization should be
available to one another.
Many companies realize that the traditional hier-
archy organized around functional units is inadequate
for competing in increasingly competitive global mar-
kets. They value work teams that integrate work-flow
processes rather than specialists in a single function or
product. Such work teams break down communica-
tion barriers between isolated functional departments,
and communication patterns take on varying forms to
accommodate team activities.
Figure 1-3 Levels of Communication
INTRAPERSONAL
• Communication within oneself
• Not considered by some to be true communication as
it does not involve a separate sender and receiver
EXAMPLES
Individual reminding himself of tasks to
complete or daily schedule
Supervisor and subordinate,
two coworkers
Committee, college class
Company, organization
Media advertisement, website
communication
INTERPERSONAL
• Communication between two people
• Goals are to (1) accomplish task confronting them (task
goal) and (2) feel better about themselves and each
other because of their interaction (maintenance goal)
GROUP
• Communication among more than two people
• Goal of achieving greater output than individual efforts
could produce
ORGANIZATIONAL
• Groups combined in such a way that large tasks may be
accomplished
• Goal of providing adequate structure for groups to
achieve their purposes
PUBLIC
• The organization reaching out to its public to achieve its
goals
• Goal of reaching many with the same message
©
iStockphoto.com/Viorika
Prikhodko
Levels of Communication
Communication can involve sending messages to both
large and small audiences. Internal messages are intended
for recipients within the organization. External messages
are directed to recipients outside the organization. When
considering the intended audience, communication can
be described as taking place on five levels: intrapersonal,
interpersonal, group, organizational, and public. Figure
1-3 depicts the five audi-
ence levels. An effective
communicator has a
clearly defined purpose for
each message and selected
strategies for targeting his
or her intended audience.
internal messages
messages intended for
recipients within the
organization
external messages
messages directed to recipients
outside the organization
©
iStockphoto.com/drfl
et
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 9
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 9 1/3/11 8:00:38 AM
1/3/11 8:00:38 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Strategic Forces
Influencing Business
Communication
C
ommunication does not take place in
a vacuum, but rather is influenced by a
number of forces at work in the envi-
ronment. The effective communicator
carefully considers each of these influ-
ences and structures communication
responsively. Four criti-
cal forces influence the
communication process
and help to determine
and define the nature
of the communication
that occurs, as shown
in Figure 1-4. These
forces are legal and
ethicalconstraints,diver-
sity challenges,changing
technology, and a team
environment.
Strategic Force 1:
Legal and Ethical Constraints
Legal and ethical constraints act as a strategic force on
communication because they set boundaries in which
communication rightfully occurs. International, federal,
state, and local laws affect the way that various busi-
ness activities are conducted. For instance, laws specify
that certain information must be stated in messages that
reply to credit applications
and those dealing with the
collection of outstanding
debts. Furthermore, one’s
own ethical standards will
often influence what he or she is willing to say in a mes-
sage. For example, a system of ethics built on honesty
might require that the message provide full disclosure
rather than a shrouding of the truth. Legal responsibili-
ties, then, are the starting point for appropriate busi-
ness communication. One’s ethical belief system, or
personal sense of right and wrong behavior, provides
further boundaries for professional activity.
The press is full of examples of unethical conduct
in business and political communities, but unethical
behavior is not relegated to the papers—it has far-
reaching consequences. Those affected by decisions, the
stakeholders, can include people inside and outside the
organization. Employees and stockholders are obvious
losers when a company fails. Competitors in the same
industry also suffer, because their strategies are based
on what they perceive about their competition. Beyond
that, financial markets as a whole suffer due to erosion
of public confidence.
Business leaders, government officials, and citizens
frequently express concern about the apparent erosion
of ethical values in society. Even for those who want to
do the right thing, matters of ethics are seldom clear-cut
decisions of right versus wrong, and they often contain
ambiguous elements. In addition, the pressure appears
to be felt most strongly by lower-level managers, often
recent business school graduates who are the least expe-
rienced at doing their jobs.
The Foundation for Legal
and Ethical Behavior
Although ethics is a common point of discussion, many
find defining ethics challenging. Most people immedi-
ately associate ethics with standards and rules of con-
duct, morals, right and wrong, values, and honesty. Dr.
Albert Schweitzer defined ethics as “the name we give
to our concern for good behavior. We feel an obligation
to consider not only our own personal well-being, but
also that of others and of human society as a whole.”4
In
P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
10
O B J E C T I V E 4
Explain how legal and
ethical constraints,
diversity challenges,
changing technology,
and team environment
act as strategic forces
that influence the
process of business
communication.
Figure 1-4 Strategic Factors Influencing Business Communication
L E G A L & E T H I C A L
CO N S T R A I N TS
• International Laws
• Domestic Laws
• Code of Ethics
• Stakeholder Interests
• Ethical Frameworks
• Personal Values
C H A N G I N G
T E C H N O LO G Y
• Accuracy and Security Issues
• Telecommunications
• Software Applications
• “High-touch” Issues
• Telecommuting
• Databases
D I V E R S I T Y
C H A L L E N G E S
• Cultural Differences
• Language Barriers
• Gender Issues
• Education Levels
• Age Factors
• Nonverbal Differences
T E A M
E N V I R O N M E N T
• Trust
• Team Roles
• Shared Goals and Expectations
• Synergy
• Group Reward
• Distributed Leadership
stakeholders
people inside and outside
the organization who are
affected by decisions
© Cengage Learning 2010
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 10
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 10 1/3/11 8:00:42 AM
1/3/11 8:00:42 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
other words, ethics refers to the principles of right and
wrong that guide you in making decisions that consider
the impact of your actions on others as well as yourself.
Though the recorded accounts of legal and ethical
misconduct would seem to indicate that businesses are
dishonest and unscrupulous, keep in mind that mil-
lions of business transactions are made daily on the
basis of honesty and concern for others. Why should
a business make ethical decisions? What difference will
it make? James E. Perrella, executive vice president
of Ingersoll-Rand Company, gave a powerful reply to
these questions:5
Many people, including many business leaders,
would argue that such an application of ethics to
business would adversely affect bottom-line per-
formance. I say nay. . . . Good ethics, simply, is
good business. Good ethics will attract investors.
Good ethics will attract good employees. You can
do what’s right. Not because of conduct codes.
Not because of rules or laws. But because you
know what’s right.
Causes of Illegal and Unethical Behavior
Understanding the major causes of illegal and unethical
behavior in the workplace will help you become sen-
sitive to signals of escalating pressure to compromise
your values. Unethical corporate behavior can have a
number of causes:
• Excessive emphasis on profits. Business managers
are often judged and paid on their ability to increase
business profits. This emphasis on profits might
send a message that the end justifies the means.
According to former Federal Reserve Chairman Alan
Greenspan, “infectious greed” ultimately pushed
companies such as Enron, Global Crossing, and
WorldCom into bankruptcy.6
• Misplaced corporate loyalty. A misplaced sense
of corporate loyalty might cause an employee to do
what seems to be in the best interest of the company,
even if the act is illegal or unethical.
• Obsession with personal advancement.
Employees who wish to outperform their peers or
are working for the next promotion might feel that
they cannot afford to fail. They might do whatever
it takes to achieve the objectives assigned to them.
• Expectation of not getting caught. Thinking that
the end justifies the
means, employees
often believe illegal
or unethical activity
will never be discov-
ered. Unfortunately,
a great deal of
improper behavior
“Mirror, Mirror . . .”
Identifying ethical issues in typical workplace situations can be difficult, and coworkers and superiors
might apply pressure for seemingly logical reasons. To illustrate, examine each of the following
workplace situations for a possible ethical dilemma:
• In order to achieve profit expectations of financial analysts, a mortgage lender approves loans to
homebuyers without verifying their ability to repay the loans.
• To prevent an adverse effect on stock prices, corporate officers deliberately withhold information
concerning a planned spinoff.
• To protect his job, a product engineer decides not to question a design flaw in a product that could
lead to possible injuries and even deaths to consumers because the
redesign would cause a delay in product introduction.
• To stay within the departmental budget, a supervisor authorizes a
software program to be installed on 50 office computers when only one
legal copy was purchased.
• Angry at a superior for an unfavorable performance appraisal, an employee
leaks confidential information (e.g., trade secrets or marketing strategies)
to an acquaintance who works for a competitor or posts highly derogative
comments about the company on his or her social networking site.
Your fundamental morals and values provide the foundation for making
ethical decisions. However, as the previous examples imply, even minor
concessions in day-to-day decisions can gradually weaken an individual’s
ethical foundation.
•
•
Y
e
c
e
©
Erik
Dreyer/Stone/Getty
Images
11
C h a p t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n
ethics
the principles of right and
wrong that guide one in
making decisions that consider
the impact of one’s actions
on others as well as on the
decision maker
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 11
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 11 1/3/11 8:00:43 AM
1/3/11 8:00:43 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
12 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
escapes detection in the business world. Believing no
one will ever find out, employees are tempted to lie,
steal, and perform other illegal acts.
• Unethical tone set by top management. If top
managers are not perceived as highly ethical, lower-
level managers might be less ethical as a result.
Employees have little incentive to act legally and
ethically if their superiors do not set an example and
encourage and reward such behavior. The saying “the
speed of the leader is the speed of the pack” illus-
trates the importance of leading by example.
• Uncertainty about whether an action is wrong.
Many times, company personnel are placed in situa-
tions in which the line between right and wrong
is not clearly defined. When caught in this gray
area, the perplexed
employee asks, “How
far is too far?”
• Unwillingness to take
a stand for what is
right. Often employees
know what is right or
wrong but are not willing to
take the risk of challenging a wrong
action. They might lack the confi-
dence or skill needed to con-
front others with sensitive legal
or ethical issues. They might
remain silent and then justify
their unwillingness to act.
Framework for Analyzing
Ethical Dilemmas
Determining whether an action is
ethical can be difficult. Learning to
analyze a dilemma from both legal
and ethical perspectives will help
you find a solution that conforms to
your own personal values. Figure 1-5
shows the four conclusions you might
reach when considering the advisability
of a particular behavior.
Dimension 1: Behavior that is illegal and
unethical. When considering some actions,
you will reach the conclusion that they are
both illegal and unethical. The law specifi-
cally outlines the “black” area—those alter-
natives that are clearly wrong—and your
employer will expect you to become an expert
in the laws that affect your particular area.
When you encounter an unfamiliar area, you
must investigate any possible legal implica-
tions. Obviously, obeying the law is in the best interest
of all concerned: you as an individual, your company,
and society. Contractual agreements between two
parties also offer guidance for legal decision making.
Frequently, your own individual sense of right and
wrong will also confirm that the illegal action is wrong
for you personally. In such situations, decisions about
appropriate behavior are obvious.
Dimension 2: Behavior that is illegal yet ethical.
Occasionally, a businessperson will decide that
even though a specific action is illegal, there is a
justifiable reason to break the law.A case in point
is a law passed in Vermont that makes it illegal
for a pharmaceutical company to give any gift
valued at more than $25 to doctors or their
personnel.7
Those supporting the law charge
that the giving of freebies drives up medical
costs by encouraging doctors to prescribe new,
more expensive brand-name drugs. The law’s
opponents contend that the gifts do not influ-
ence doctors and are merely educational tools
for new products. Although a pharmaceuti-
cal firm and its employees might see nothing
wrong with providing gifts worth in excess of
$25, they would be well advised to consider the
penalty of $10,000 per violation before acting
on their personal ethics. A better course of action
would be to act within the law, possibly while lob-
bying for a change in the law.
Dimension 3: Behavior
that is legal yet unethi-
cal. If you determine that
a behavior is legal and
complies with relevant
contractual agreements
and company policy, your
next step is to consult your
ng to
ing a wrong
the confi-
con-
ve legal
might
ustify
ct.
ing
action is
arning to
oth legal
will help
nforms to
Figure 1-5
you might
e advisability
at is illegal and
ng some actions,
ion that they are
The law specifi-
area—those alter-
wrong—and your
o become an expert
our particular area.
nfamiliar area, you
ible legal implica-
of all concerned: you as an in
and society. Contractual ag
parties also offer guidance fo
Frequently, your own indivi
wrong will also confirm that t
for you personally. In such si
appropriate behavior are obvi
Dimension 2: Behavior tha
Occasionally, a busines
even though a specific a
justifiable reason to bre
is a law passed in Verm
for a pharmaceutical
valued at more than
personnel.7
Those su
that the giving of fr
costs by encouraging
more expensive bran
opponents contend t
ence doctors and are
for new products. A
cal firm and its emp
wrong with providing
$2
$ 5, they would be we
penalty of $10,000 per
on their personal ethics.
would be to act within th
bying for a change in the
c
a
co
co
an
next
©
Stockbyte/Getty
Images
DIMENSION 1
Behavior that is illegal
and unethical
DIMENSION 3
Behavior that is legal
yet unethical
DIMENSION 2
Behavior that is illegal
yet ethical
DIMENSION 4
Behavior that is both
legal and ethical
Figure 1-5 Four Dimensions of Business Behavior
© Cengage Learning 2010
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 12
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 12 1/3/11 8:00:45 AM
1/3/11 8:00:45 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
company’s or profession’s code of ethics. This written
document summarizes the company’s or profession’s
standards of ethical conduct. Some companies refer to
this document as a credo. If the behavior does not vio-
late the code of ethics, then put it to the test of your
own personal integrity. You may at times reject a legal
action because it does not “feel right.” Most Americans
were appalled to learn that mortgage bankers’ reckless
abandonment of traditional lending standards led to
the subprime mortgage meltdown. Although they might
have acted legally, their profiting at the expense of com-
pany employees, stockholders, and the public hardly
seemed ethical. You might be faced with situations in
which you reject a behavior that is legal because you
would not be proud to have your family and commu-
nity know that you engaged in it.
Dimension 4: Behavior that is both legal and ethical.
Decisions in this dimension are easy to make. Such
actions comply with the law, company policies, and
your professional and personal codes of ethics.
The Pagano Model offers a straightforward method
for determining whether a proposed action is advis-
able.8
For this system to work, you must answer the
following six questions honestly:
• Is the proposed action legal? (This is the core starting
point.)
• What are the benefits and costs to the people
involved?
• Would you want this action to be a universal stan-
dard, appropriate for everyone?
• Does the action pass the light-of-day test? That is, if
your action appeared on television or others learned
about it, would you be proud?
• Does the action pass the Golden Rule test? That is,
would you want the same to happen to you?
• Does the action pass the ventilation test? Ask the
opinion of a wise friend with no investment in
the outcome. Does this friend believe the action is
ethical?
Martha Stewart was found guilty of conspiracy,
obstruction of justice, and making false statements
regarding her sale of shares of ImClone stock just
before the company’s downturn. Some have defended
her action as neither illegal nor immoral, while oth-
ers have argued that cracking down on Stewart sent
an important message about stock-market manipu-
lation. “It’s very important for us to protect integrity
of this system,” said David Kelley, the U.S. attorney in
Manhattan, after the verdict.“Failure to do so results in
a flood of corruption.”9
Strategic Force 2:
Diversity Challenges
Diversity in the workplace is another strategic force influ-
encing communication. Differences between the sender
and the receiver in areas such as culture, age, gender, and
education require sensitivity on the part of both parties
so that the intended message is the one that is received.
Understanding how to communicate effectively
with people from other cultures has become more inte-
gral to the work environment as many U.S. companies
are increasingly conducting business with international
companies or becoming multinational. Candy manufac-
turer Jelly Belly learned a great deal about cultural dif-
ferences when the company opened business operations
in Thailand. In Thailand, many more employee ameni-
ties are required than U.S. employers are accustomed to
providing. For example, a Thai employer is expected to
provide transportation to and from work as well as free
meals and a workout facility for its employees.10
When addressing cultural differences, successful
communication must often span barriers of language
and differing world views resulting from societal and
religious beliefs and practices. When a person fails to
consider these factors, communication suffers, and
the result is often embarrassing and potentially costly.
McDonald’s is an example of a large U.S. company
that has expanded its operations to include most major
countries in the world. To be successful on an interna-
tional scale, managers had to be aware of cultural dif-
ferences and be willing to work to ensure that effective
communication occurred despite these barriers.
Occasionally,however,a whopper of an intercultural
communication faux pas occurs. That is what happened
when McDonald’s began its promotional campaign in
Great Britain for the World Cup soccer championship.
It seemed like a clever (and harmless) idea to reproduce
the flags of the 24 nations participating in the event and
print them on packaging—two million Happy Meal
bags, to be exact. What marketing personnel failed to
consider was that words from the Koran are printed on
the Saudi flag. The idea that sacred words from Islam’s
holy book were mass printed to sell a product with the
knowledge that the packages would be thrown into the
trash angered and offended many Muslims, who imme-
diately complained. McDonald’s apologized for the
gaffe and agreed to work with Saudis to find a solution
to the problem.11
This example shows of how much “homework” is
involved in maintaining good relations with custom-
ers or clients from other cultures. The potential barrier
13
C h a p t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 13
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 13 1/3/11 8:00:48 AM
1/3/11 8:00:48 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
14 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
of language is obvious; however, successful managers
know that much more is involved in communicating
with everyone—across cultures, genders, ages, abilities,
and other differences.
Communication Opportunities
and Challenges in Diversity
As world markets continue
to expand, U.S. employees
at home and abroad will
be doing business with
more people from other
countries. You might
find yourself work-
ing abroad for a large
American company,
an international com-
pany with a plant in
the United States, or a
company with an ethni-
cally diverse workforce.
Regardless of the workplace,
your diversity skills—that is,
your ability to communicate effec-
tively with both men and women of
all ages, cultures, and minority groups—
will affect your success in today’s culturally diverse
global economy.
Workplace diversity can lead to misunderstandings
and miscommunications, but it also poses opportunities
to improve both workers and organizations. Managers
must be prepared to communicate effectively with
workers of different nationalities, genders, races, ages,
abilities, and so forth.
Managing a diverse workforce effectively will
require you to communicate with everyone and to help
all employees reach their fullest potential and contrib-
ute to the company’s goals. To lessen miscommunica-
tion, which inevitably occurs, increasing numbers of
companies have undertaken diversity initiatives and
are providing diversity training seminars to help work-
ers understand and appreciate gender and age differ-
ences and the cultures of
coworkers.
Culture and
Communication
Managers with the desire
andtheskilltoconductbusi-
ness in new international
markets and to manage a diverse workforce effectively
will confront problems created by cultural differences.
The way messages are decoded and encoded is not just
a function of the experiences, beliefs, and assumptions
of the person sending or receiving those messages
but also is shaped by the society in which
he or she lives.
People learn patterns of
behavior from their culture.
The culture of a people is the
product of their living expe-
riences within their own
society. Culture could be
described as “the way
of life” of a people and
includes a vast array of
behaviors and beliefs.
These patterns affect
how people perceive the
world, what they value,
andhowtheyact.Differing
patterns can also create bar-
riers to communication.
Barriers to Intercultural
Communication
Because cultures give different definitions of such basics
of interaction as values and norms, people raised in two
different cultures can clash in various ways.
• Ethnocentrism. Problems occur between people of
different cultures primarily because people tend to
assume that their own cultural norms are the right
way to do things. They wrongly believe that the
specific patterns of behavior desired in their own
cultures are universally valued. This belief, known as
enthnocentrism, is certainly natural; but learning
about other cultures and developing sensitivity will
help minimize ethnocentric reactions when dealing
with other cultures.
• Stereotypes. We often form a mental picture of
the main characteristics of another group, creating
preformed ideas of what people in this group are
©
Feng
lei
sh/Imaginechina
via
AP
Images
“Your ability to communicate
effectively with both men and women
of all ages, cultures, and minority
groups will affect your success in
today’s culturally diverse global
economy.”
diversity skills
the ability to communicate
effectively with both men and
women of all ages, cultures,
and minority groups
ethnocentrism
the assumption that one’s
own cultural norms are the
right way to do things
portunities
versity
ntinue
yees
will
h
-
ce.
ace,
hat is,
ate effec-
d women of
i it
but also is shape
he or she liv
Peop
behav
The
pr
r
a
pa
riers
Barriers to
Communicatio
For many U.S. corporations, such as Procter
& Gamble, more than 70 percent of total
sales in recent years has come from
international operations.
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 14
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 14 1/3/11 8:00:48 AM
1/3/11 8:00:48 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
15
C h a p t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n
like. These pictures, called stereotypes, influence the
way we interact with members of the other group.
When we observe a behavior that conforms to the
stereotype, the validity of the preconceived notion
is reinforced. We often view the other person as a
representative of a class of people rather than as an
individual. People of all cultures have stereotypes
about other cultural groups they have encountered.
These stereotypes can interfere with communication
when people interact on the basis of the imagined
representative and not the real individual.
• Interpretation of time. The study of how a culture
perceives time and its use is called chronemics. In
the United States, we have a saying that “time is
money.” Canadians, like some northern Europeans
who are also concerned about punctuality, make
appointments, keep them, and complete them, and
waste no time in the process. In some other cultures,
time is the cheapest commodity and an inexhaustible
resource; time represents a person’s span on Earth,
which is only part of eternity. To these cultures,
engaging in long, casual conversations prior to seri-
ous discussions or negotiations is time well spent
in establishing and nurturing relationships. On the
other hand, the time-efficient American businessper-
son is likely to fret about wasting precious time.
• Personal space requirements. Space operates as
a language just as time does. The study of cultural
space requirements is known as proxemics. In all
cultures, the distance between people functions in
communication as “personal space” or “personal ter-
ritory.” In the United States, for example, for intimate
conversations with close friends and relatives, indi-
viduals are willing to stay within about a foot and a
half of each other; for casual conversations, up to two
or three feet; for job interviews and personal business,
four to twelve feet; and for public occasions, more
than twelve feet. However, in many cultures outside
the United States, closer personal contact is accepted,
or greater distance might be the norm.
• Body language. The study of body language is
known as kinesics. Body language is not universal,
but instead is learned from one’s culture. Even the
most basic gestures have varying cultural meanings—
the familiar North American symbol for “okay”
means zero in France, money in Japan, and an
expression of vulgarity in Brazil. Similarly, eye con-
tact, posture, and facial expressions carry different
meanings throughout the world.
• Translation limitations. Words in one language
do not always have an equivalent meaning in other
languages, and the concepts the words describe are
often different as well. Translators can be helpful,
but keep in mind that a translator is working with
a second language and must listen to one language,
mentally cast the words into another language, and
then speak them. This process is difficult and opens
the possibility that the translator will fall victim to
one or more cultural barriers.
Even if you cannot speak or write another language
fluently, people from other cultures will appreciate sim-
ple efforts to learn a few common phrases.
Strategic Force 3:
Changing Technology
Electronic tools have not eliminated the need for basic
communication skills; they can, in fact, create new
obstacles or barriers to communication that must be
Brazil, United States, Other places,
not okay okay better check first
X ?
©
Hemera
Technologies/AbleStock.com
Image/Jupiterimages
stereotypes
mental pictures that one
group forms of the main
characteristics of another
group, creating preformed
ideas of what people in this
group are like
chronemics
the study of how a culture
perceives time and its use
proxemics
the study of cultural space
requirements
kinesics
the study of body language,
which is not universal, but
instead is learned from one’s
culture
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 15
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 15 1/3/11 8:00:52 AM
1/3/11 8:00:52 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
overcome. These tools, however, also create opportuni-
ties, which range from new kinds of communications to
improved quality of the messages themselves. Electronic
tools, such as the Internet, intranets, document produc-
tion software, multimedia presentations, Web publish-
ing tools, and email, can help people in various ways,
such as by (1) collecting and analyzing data, (2) shap-
ing messages to be clearer and more effective, and
(3) communicating quickly and efficiently with others
in geographically dispersed locations.
Using various communication technologies, indi-
viduals can often work in their homes or other remote
locations and send and receive work from the com-
pany office electronically. Telecommuting (also referred
to as teleworking) offers various advantages, includ-
ing reduced travel time and increased work flexibility.
Laptops and smartphones provide computing power
and connectivity for professionals wherever they are.
While the public Internet is
accessible to everyone and
offers a wide array of infor-
mation, private databases
provide specialized and
advanced information on
specific topics. Databases
enable decision makers to obtain information quickly
and accurately and offer these advantages:
• Data organization—the ability to organize large
amounts of data.
• Data integrity—assurance that the data will be
accurate and complete.
• Data security—assurance that the data are secure
because access to a database is controlled through
several built-in data security features.
Internal databases contain proprietary information
that is pertinent to the particular business or organiza-
tion and its employees. External databases (networks)
allow users to access information from remote loca-
tions literally around the world and in an instant trans-
fer that information to their own computers for further
manipulation or storage. Information is available on
general news, stocks, financial markets, sports, travel,
weather, and a variety of publications.
Knowing how to“tunnel”through the vast amounts
of irrelevant information available on the Internet to
find what you want can be overwhelming. The expe-
rience can also be expensive in terms of human time
spent and charges incurred for online time. Locating
information from electronic sources requires that you
telecommuting
also called teleworking;
working at home or other
remote locations and sending
and receiving work from the
company office electronically
Legal and Ethical Implications of Technology
In addition to its many benefits, technology poses some challenges
for the business communicator. For instance, technology raises issues
of ownership, as in the case of difficulties that arise in protecting the
copyright of documents transmitted over the Internet. Technology
poses dilemmas over access, that is, who has the right to certain stored
information pertaining to an individual or a company.
Technology threatens our individual privacy, our right to be left
alone, free from surveillance or interference from other individuals
or organizations. Common invasions of privacy caused by technology
include
• collecting excessive amounts of information for decision making and
maintaining too many files.
• monitoring the exact time employees spend on a specific task and
between tasks and the exact number and length of breaks, and
supervisors’ or coworkers’ reading of another employee’s email and
computer files.
• integrating computer files containing information collected from
more than one agency without permission.12
©
iStockphoto.com/Nghe
Tran
16 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 16
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 16 1/3/11 8:00:53 AM
1/3/11 8:00:53 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
17
C h a p t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n
know the search procedures and methods for construct-
ing an effective search strategy.
Effective use of various communication tech-
nologies helps ensure timely, targeted messages and
responses and helps to build interpersonal relation-
ships. This responsiveness leads to positive interactions
with colleagues and strong customer commitment.
Strategic Force 4:
Team Environment
As firms around the world face problems of decreas-
ing productivity, faltering product quality, and worker
dissatisfaction, work teams are seen as a way to help
firms remain globally competitive. Decentralized deci-
sion making enables teams of people to communicate in
a peer-to-peer fashion, rather than following traditional
lines of authority, and new technologies give employees
the ability to communicate easily and openly with one
another and with those outside the firm.
Although worker involvement in the management
process has long been the hallmark of Japanese busi-
ness, many businesses in the United States and else-
where are empowering self-directed work teams to
accomplish various assignments.13
The list of compa-
nies using self-directed work teams is diverse, includ-
ing Hunt-Wesson, the Internal Revenue Service, the
San Diego Zoo, Hewlett-Packard, Southwest Airlines,
Toyota, Motorola, General Electric, and Corning.
WorkTeam Defined
The terms team, work team, group, work group, cross-
functional team, and self-directed team are often used
interchangeably.14
Whatever the title, a team is a small
number of people with complementary skills who work
together for a common purpose. Team members set
their own goals, in cooperation with management, and
plan how to achieve those goals and how their work is
to be accomplished. The central organizing element of
a team is that it has a common purpose and measurable
goals for which the team can be held accountable, inde-
pendent of its individual members. Employees in a self-
directed work team handle a wide array of functions
and work with a minimum of direct supervision.15
A key element in team success is the concept of syn-
ergy, defined as a situation in which the whole is greater
than the sum of the parts. Teams provide a depth of
expertise that is unavailable at the individual level.Teams
open lines of communication that then lead to increased
interaction among employees and between employees
and management. The result is that teams help compa-
nies reach their goals of delivering higher-quality prod-
ucts and services faster and with more cost effectiveness.
Communication Differences inWorkTeams
In the past, most businesses were operated in a hierar-
chical fashion, with most decisions made at the top and
communication following a top-down/bottom-up pat-
tern. Communication patterns are different in success-
ful team environments as compared with traditional
organizational structures:
• Trust building is the primary factor that changes the
organization’s communication patterns.
• Open meetings are an important method for enhanc-
ing communication, as they educate employees about
the business while building bridges of understanding
and trust.
• Shared leadership, which involves more direct and
effective communication between management and
its internal customers,
is common.
• Listening, problem
solving, conflict
resolution, negotia-
tion, and consensus
become important
factors in group
communication.
Some major strengths of teams
are as follows:16
9Teams make workers happier
by causing them to feel that
they are shaping their own
jobs.
9Teams increase efficiency by
eliminating layers of managers
whose job was once to pass
orders downward.
9Teams enable a company
to draw on the skills and
imagination of a whole
workforce.
©
Image
Source
team
a small number of people with
complementary skills who
work together for a common
purpose
synergy
a situation in which the whole
is greater than the sum of the
parts
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 17
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 17 1/3/11 8:00:53 AM
1/3/11 8:00:53 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
• Information flows vertically up to management and
down to workers, as well as horizontally among
team members, other teams, and supervisors.
Communication is perhaps the single most impor-
tant aspect of successful teamwork. Open lines of com-
munication increase interaction between employees
and management. All affected parties should be kept
informed as projects progress.
Maximization ofWorkTeam Effectiveness
Grouping employees into a team structure does not
mean that they will automatically function as a team.
A group must go through a developmental process to
begin to function as a team. Members need training in
such areas as problem solving, goal setting, and conflict
resolution. Teams must be encouraged to establish the
“three Rs”—roles, rules, and relationships.17
The self-directed work team can become the basic
organizational building block to best ensure success in
dynamic global competition. Skills for successful partici-
pationinteamenvironmentsaresomewhatdifferentfrom
those necessary for success in old-style organizations:
• Ability to give and take constructive criticism, listen
actively, clearly impart one’s views to others, and
provide meaningful feedback.
• Skills in breaking down emotional barriers, such as
insecurity or condescension.
• Ability to promote team functioning by remov-
ing process barriers, such as rigid policies and
procedures.
• Understanding of the feelings and needs of cowork-
ers so members feel comfortable stating their opin-
ions and discussing the strengths and weaknesses of
the team.
• Skills in overcoming cultural barriers, such as ste-
reotyped roles and responsibilities, that can separate
workers from management.18
• Application of leadership skills that apply to a
dynamic group setting and lead to team success. In
dynamic team leadership, referred to as distributed
leadership, the role of leader can alternate among
members, and more than one leadership style can be
active at any given time.19
Gender, cultural, and age differences among mem-
bers of a team can present barriers to team commu-
nication. Knowing what behaviors can limit the group
process is imperative to maximizing results. Team mem-
bers might need awareness training to assist in recogniz-
ing behaviors that may hinder team performance and in
overcoming barriers that can limit the effectiveness of
their communication.
©
Rachel
Epstein/PhotoEdit
To improve group communication, time needs to be set aside to assess the quality of
interaction. Questions to pose about the group process might include the following:
What roles are
members playing? For
instance, is one person
dominating while others
contribute little or nothing?
Is the group dealing
with conflict in a
positive way?
What are our
common goals?
What in the
group process is
going well?
What about the
group process could
be improved?
18 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 18
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 18 1/3/11 8:00:55 AM
1/3/11 8:00:55 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
REVIEW
BCOM3 puts a multitude of study
aids at your fingertips. After
reading the chapters, check out
these resources for further help:
• Chapter in Review cards,
Model Document Cards, and
Style Cards can be found at the
back of the book. These detach-
able, convenient cards provide
you with a portable study tool
with all of the pertinent informa-
tion for class preparation:
° learning outcome summaries
° key term definitions
° communication checklists
° grammar quizzes
° visual summaries
° additional model documents
° page layout, letter and punctua-
tion style guidelines
• Interactive and printable flash
cards online give you several
additional ways to check your
comprehension of key concepts.
• Other great ways to help you
study include the Interactive
eBook, Chapter Quizzes,
Assignments & Handouts,
E-Lectures, Cases, Games
(Crossword Puzzles & Quiz
Bowl), Glossary, Learning
Objectives, PowerPoint®
,
Videos, Grammar Games,
Templates, and Language
Review Quizzes.
You can find it all at CourseMate.
Login at www.cengagebrain.com
HE
DID
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 19
27776_ch01_002-019.indd 19 1/3/11 8:01:07 AM
1/3/11 8:01:07 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
20 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
Behavioral Theories that
Impact Communication
I
nterpersonal intelligence pertains to the abil-
ity to read, empathize, and understand oth-
ers.1
People with interpersonal intelligence are
good with people and thrive in social interac-
tion. Rather than being a quality that some are
born with and others are not, interper-
sonal intelligence can
be improved by broad-
ening your under-
standing of human
behavior and moti-
vation and practic-
ing certain behaviors
when in interpersonal
situations. Knowledge
from the fields of soci-
ology and psychology
is helpful to understanding human needs and providing
you with valuable insights about how to achieve effec-
tive communication in the workplace.
Recognizing Human Needs
Psychologist Abraham Maslow developed the concept of
a hierarchy of needs through which people progress. In
our society, most people have reasonably satisfied their
two lower-level needs: (1) physiological needs (food
and basic provision) and
(2) their security and safety
needs (shelter and protec-
tion from the elements and
physical danger). Beyond
O
B
J
E
C
T
I
V
E
S 1 Explain how behavioral theories
about human needs, trust and
disclosure, and motivation relate
to business communication.
2 Describe the role of nonverbal
messages in communication.
3 Identify aspects of effective
listening.
4 Identify factors affecting group
and team communication.
5 Discuss aspects of effective
meeting management.
BCOM
Communication Foundations
Part 1 Chapter 2
Focusing on
Interpersonal and
Group Communication
O B J E C T I V E 1
Explain how
behavioral theories
about human needs,
trust and disclosure,
and motivation
relate to business
communication.
©
iStockphoto.com/Alexandr
Tovstenko
interpersonal
intelligence
the ability to read, empathize,
and understand others
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 20
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 20 1/3/11 8:21:01 AM
1/3/11 8:21:01 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
21
C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n
C H A P T E R
these two basic need levels, people progress to satisfy
the three upper-level needs: (3) social needs for love,
acceptance, and belonging; (4) ego or esteem needs to be
heard, appreciated, and wanted; and (5) self-actualizing
needs, including the need to achieve one’s fullest poten-
tial through professional, philanthropic, political, educa-
tional, and artistic channels.
As people satisfy needs at one level, they move on
to the next. The levels that have been satisfied still are
present, but their importance diminishes. Effective com-
municators are able to identify and appeal to need levels
in various individuals or groups.Advertising is designed
to appeal to need levels. Luxury car and dream vacation
ads appeal to ego needs, teeth whitening and anti-aging
product messages appeal to social needs, and identity
theft, health and fitness, and environmentally friendly
commercials appeal to security and safety needs. Efforts
to help employees satisfy their needs are essential, since
a satisfied worker is generally more productive than a
dissatisfied one. In communication activities, a sender’s
message is more likely to appeal to the receiver if the
receiver’s need is accurately identified.
2
©
Milena
Boniek/PhotoAlto/Photolibrary
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 21
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 21 1/3/11 8:21:06 AM
1/3/11 8:21:06 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
22 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
Stroking
People engage in communication with oth-
ers in the hope that the outcome might lead
to mutual trust, mutual pleasure, and psy-
chological well-being. The communication
exchange is a means of sharing information
about things, ideas, tasks, and selves.
Each communication interaction, whether
casual or formal,provides an emotional stroke
that can have either a positive or a negative
effect on your feelings about yourself and
others. Getting a pat on the back from the
supervisor, receiving a congratulatory phone
call or text message, and being listened to by
another person are examples of everyday pos-
itive strokes. Negative strokes might include
receiving a hurtful comment, being avoided or
left out of conversation, and receiving a rep-
rimand from a superior. By paying attention
to the importance of strokes, managers can
greatly improve communication and people’s
feelings about their work.
Exploring the Johari Window
As relationships develop, the people involved
continue to learn about each other and them-
selves, as shown by the Johari Window in
Figure 2-1. Area I, the free or open area, rep-
resents what we know about ourselves and
what others know about us. Area II, the blind
area, designates those things others know about us but
that we don’t know about ourselves; for example, you
are the only person who can’t see your physical self as
it really is. Things we know about ourselves but that
others don’t know about us occupy the hidden or secret
area III. Area IV includes the unknown: things we don’t
know about ourselves and others don’t know about us,
such as our ability to handle emergency situations if
we’ve never been faced with them.
Each of the window areas can vary in size accord-
ing to the degree to which we learn about ourselves and
are willing to disclose things about ourselves to others.
Reciprocal sharing occurs when people develop trust
in each other. When a con-
fidant demonstrates that he
or she can be trusted, trust
is reinforced and leads to
an expansion of the open
area of the Johari Window.
Usually we are willing to tell
people about various things that aren’t truly personal.
But we share personal thoughts, ambitions, and inner
feelings only with selected others—those whom we have
learned to trust. The relationships existing between
supervisor and employee, doctor and patient, and law-
yer and client are those of trust, but only in specific
areas. In more intimate relationships with significant
others, siblings, and parents, deeper, personal feelings
are entrusted to each other.
The idea that trust and openness lead to better com-
munication between two people also applies to groups.
Managers engaged in organizational development (OD)
are concerned with developing successful organizations
by building effective small groups. They believe small
group effectiveness evolves mostly from a high level of
mutual trust among group members. The aim of OD is
to open emotional as well as task-oriented communi-
cation. To accomplish this aim, groups often become
involved in encounter sessions designed to enlarge the
open areas of the Johari Window.2
Figure 2-1 The Johari Window
KNOWN
TO
OTHERS
NOT
KNOWN
TO
OTHERS
KNOWN
TO SELF
NOT
KNOWN
TO SELF
I
Free
or
Open
Area
II
Blind
Area
III
Hidden
Area
IV
Unknown
Area
stroke
emotional response one
gets in a communication
interaction that has either a
positive or negative effect on
feelings about oneself and
others
©
iStockphoto.com/Stephen
Strathdee
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 22
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 22 1/3/11 8:21:09 AM
1/3/11 8:21:09 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
23
C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n
Contrasting Management Styles
Douglas McGregor, a management theorist, attempted
to distinguish between the older, traditional view that
workers are concerned only about satisfying lower-
level needs and the more contemporary view that
productivity can be enhanced by assisting workers
in satisfying higher-level needs. Under the older view,
management exercised strong control, emphasized
the job to the exclusion of concern for the individual,
and sought to motivate solely through external incen-
tives—a job and a paycheck. McGregor labeled this
management style Theory X. Under the contemporary
style, Theory Y, management strives to balance con-
trol and individual freedom. By treating the individual
as a mature person, management lessens the need for
external motivation; treated as adults, people will act
as adults.
The situational leadership model developed by
Paul Hersey and Kenneth Blanchard does not pre-
scribe a single leadership style, but advocates that what
is appropriate in each case depends on the follower
(subordinate) and the task to be performed. Directive
behavior is characterized by the leader’s giving detailed
rules and instructions and monitoring closely that they
are followed. The leader decides what is to be done and
how. In contrast, supportive behavior is characterized
by the leader’s listening, communicating, recognizing,
and encouraging. Different degrees of directive and sup-
portive behavior can be desirable, given the situation.3
Combining the ideas of Maslow and McGregor with
those of Hersey and Blanchard leads to the conclusion
that “the right job for the person” is a better philosophy
than “the right person for the job.”
The Total Quality Management movement focuses
on creating a more responsible role for the worker in
an organization. In a Total Quality Management envi-
ronment, decision-making power is distributed to the
people closest to the problem, who usually have the
best information sources and solutions. Each employee,
from the president to the custodian, is expected to
solve problems, participate in team-building efforts,
and expand the scope of his or her role in the organiza-
tion. The goal of employee empowerment is to build a
work environment in which all employees take pride
in their work accomplishments and begin motivating
themselves from within rather than through traditional
extrinsic incentives.4
Managers of many companies
understand that empowering employees to initiate
continuous improvements is critical for survival. Only
companies producing quality products and services will
survive in today’s world market.
Nonverbal
Communication
M
anagers use verbal and nonverbal
messages to communicate ideas to
employees. Verbal means “through
the use of words,” either written or
spoken. Nonverbal means“without
the use of words.” Although major
attention in communi-
cation study is given to
verbal messages, stud-
ies show that nonverbal
elements can account
for more than 90 per-
cent of the total mean-
ing of a message.5
Nonverbal communication includes
metacommunication and kinesic messages.
Metacommunication
A metacommunication is a message that, although
not expressed in words, accompanies a message that
is expressed in words. For example, “Don’t be late for
work” communicates caution; yet the sentence might
imply (but not express in words) such additional ideas
as “You are frequently late, and I’m warning you,” or
“I doubt your dependability.” “Your solution is per-
fect” might also convey a metacommunication such
as “You are efficient,” or “I certainly like your work.”
Whether you are speak-
ing or writing, you can
be confident that those
who receive your mes-
sages will be sensitive to
the messages expressed
in words and to the
accompanying messages
that are present but not
expressed in words.
Kinesic
Messages
People constantly send
meaning through kinesic
communication, an idea
expressed through non-
verbal behavior. In other
words, receivers gain
directive behavior
characterized by leaders
who give detailed rules and
instructions and monitor
closely that they are followed
supportive behavior
characterized by leaders who
listen, communicate, recognize,
and encourage their followers
Total Quality
Management
focuses on creating a more
responsible role for the
worker in an organization by
distributing decision–making
power to the people closest
to the problem, empowering
employees to initiate
continuous improvements
metacommunication
a nonverbal message that,
although not expressed in
words, accompanies a message
that is expressed in words
O B J E C T I V E 2
Describe the role of
nonverbal messages in
communication.
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 23
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 23 1/3/11 8:21:11 AM
1/3/11 8:21:11 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
24 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
additional meaning from what they see and hear—the
visual and the vocal:
• Visual kinesic communication—gestures, winks,
smiles, frowns, sighs, attire, grooming, and all kinds
of body movements.
• Vocal kinesic communication—intonation, projec-
tion, and resonance of the voice.
Following are some examples of kinesic messages
and the meanings they can convey.
Action
Possible Kinesic
Message
A wink or light chuckle
follows a statement.
“Don’t believe what I just
said.”
A manager is
habitually late for
staff meetings and
with email replies.
“My time is more
important than yours.
You can wait for me.”
Alternately, the action
might be ordinary for a
non-U.S.-born manager.
A group leader sits at a
position other than at
the head of the table.
“I want to demonstrate
my equality with other
members.”
An employee wears
clothing that reveals
tattoos, which violates
the company’s dress
code.
“Rules are for other
people; I can do what
I want.” Alternately, “I
do not understand the
expectations.”
A job applicant submits
a résumé containing
numerous errors.
“My language skills are
deficient.” Alternately, “I
didn’t care to do my best.”
Understanding
Nonverbal Messages
Metacommunications and kinesic messages have char-
acteristics that all communicators should take into
account.
• Nonverbal messages cannot be avoided. Both
written and spoken words convey ideas in addition
to the ideas contained in the words used. All actions—
and even the lack of action—have meaning to those
who observe them.
• Nonverbal messages can
have different meanings
for different people. If a
team member smiles after
making a statement, one
member might conclude
that the speaker was try-
ing to be funny; another
might conclude that the
speaker was pleased about having made such a great
contribution; another might see the smile as indicat-
ing friendliness.
• Nonverbal messages vary between and within
cultures. Not only do nonverbal messages have
different meanings from culture to culture, but men
and women from the same culture typically exhibit
different body language. As a rule, U.S. men make
less body contact with other men than do women
with women. Acceptable male body language might
include a handshake or a pat on the back, while
women are afforded more flexibility in making body
contact with each other.
• Nonverbal messages can be intentional or
unintentional. “You are right about that” can be
intended to mean “I agree with you” or “You are
right on this issue, but you have been wrong on all
others discussed.”
• Nonverbal messages can contradict the accom-
panying verbal message, and affect whether
your message is understood or believed. The
adage “actions speak louder than words” reveals
much about how people perceive messages. Picture
a person who says, “I’m happy to be here,” but
looks at the floor, talks in a weak and halting voice,
and clasps his hands timidly in front of his body.
Because his verbal and nonverbal messages are
contradictory, his audience might not trust his
words. Similarly, consider the negative effect
of a sloppy personal appearance by a job
candidate.
• Nonverbal messages can receive more
attention than verbal messages. If a
supervisor repeatedly glances at his cell
phone for text messages or rhythmically taps a
pen while making a statement, the words might
not register in the employee’s mind. An error in
basic grammar might receive more attention
than the idea that is being transmitted.
• Nonverbal messages provide clues
about the sender’s background and
motives. For example, excessive use of
big words might suggest that a person
reads widely or has an above-average
education; it might also suggest a need
for social recognition or insecurity
about his or her social background.
• Nonverbal messages are influenced
by the circumstances surrounding
the communication. Assume that two
men, Ganesh and Jacob, are friends at
work. When they are together on the job,
Ganesh sometimes puts his hand on Jacob’s
shoulder. To Jacob, the act could mean noth-
ust his
ffect
b
e
taps a
s might
error in
ntion
b,
ob’s
noth-
©
Richard
Ransier/Corbis
visual kinesic
communication
gestures, winks, smiles,
frowns, sighs, attire,
grooming, and all kinds of
body movements
vocal kinesic
communication
intonation, projection, and
resonance of the voice
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 24
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 24 1/3/11 8:21:12 AM
1/3/11 8:21:12 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
25
C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n
ing more than “We are close friends.” But suppose
Ganesh is a member of a committee that subse-
quently denies a promotion for Jacob. Afterward,
the same act could mean “We are still friends,” but it
could also cause resentment. Because of the circum-
stances, the same act could now mean something
such as “Watch the hand that pats; it can also stab.”
• Nonverbal messages can be beneficial or harm-
ful. Words or actions can be accompanied by nonver-
bal messages that help or hurt the sender’s purpose.
Metacommunications and kinesic communications
can convey something such as “I am efficient in my
business and considerate of others,” or they can con-
vey the opposite. They cannot be eliminated, but you
can make them work for you instead of against you.
Listening as a
Communication Skill
D
espite the fact that many professionals
believe incorrectly that business com-
munication is about presentation and
not interaction, most managers spend
a major part of their day listening and
speaking with others. Listening to
supervisors, employees,
customers, and col-
leagues commonly con-
sumes more of business
employees’ time than
reading, writing, and
speaking combined. Listening is an interpersonal skill
as critical as the skill of speaking. CEO Brad Anderson
of Best Buy explains that effective listening is central to
the work culture of his young retail employees who have
grown up in a digital age and expect a two-way conver-
sation in a peer-to-peer fashion rather than a one-way
lecture. Anderson emphasizes that being perceived as a
poor listener would “shut him down as a CEO.”6
Effective listening habits pay off in several ways:
; Good listeners are liked by others because they sat-
isfy the basic human needs of being heard and being
wanted.
; People who listen well are able to separate fact from
fiction, cope effectively with false persuasion, and
avoid having others use them for personal gain.
; Effective listening leads to sensitivity and tolerance
toward key individuals who are critical to the orga-
nization’s success, such as employees, customers, and
suppliers.
; Effective listeners are engaged and constantly
learning—gaining knowledge and skills that lead to
increased creativity, job performance, advancement,
and satisfaction.
; Job satisfaction increases when people know what
is going on, when they are heard, and when they
participate in the mutual trust that develops from
good communication.
Listening depends on your abilities to receive and
decode both verbal and nonverbal messages. The best-
devised messages and sophisticated communication
systems will not work unless people on the receiving
end of spoken messages actually listen. Senders of spo-
ken messages must assume their receivers can and will
listen, just as senders of written messages must assume
their receivers can and will read.
Listening for a Specific Purpose
Individuals satisfy a variety of purposes through listen-
ing: (1) interacting socially, (2) receiving information,
(3) solving problems, and (4) sharing feelings with oth-
ers. Each activity may call for a different style of listen-
ing or for a combination of styles.
• Casual listening. Listening for pleasure, recreation,
amusement, and relaxation is casual listening. Some
people listen to music all day long to relax the brain
and mask unwanted sounds during daily routines,
work periods, and daily commutes. Aspects of casual
listening are as follows:
{ It provides relaxing breaks from more serious
tasks and supports our emotional health.
{ It illustrates that people are selective listeners.
You listen to what you want to hear. In a crowded
room in which everyone seems to be talking, you
can block out all the noise and engage in the con-
versation you are having with someone.
{ It doesn’t require much emotional or physical effort.
• Listening for information. Listening for informa-
tion involves the search for data or material. In a
lecture class, for example, the instructor usually has
a strategy for guiding the class to desired goals. The
instructor will probably stress several major points
and use supporting evidence to prove or to reinforce
them. When engaged
in this type of
listening, you could
become so focused on
recording every detail
that you take copious
notes with no organi-
zation. When listen-
ing for information:
sp
a
o
th
gr
sa
le
p
O B J E C T I V E 3
Identify aspects of
effective listening.
casual listening
listening for pleasure,
recreation, amusement, and
relaxation
listening for
information
listening that involves the
search for data or material
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 25
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 25 1/3/11 8:21:16 AM
1/3/11 8:21:16 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
26 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
{ Use an outlining process to help you capture main
ideas and supporting subpoints in a logical way.
{ Watch the speaker as you listen to him or her,
since most speakers exhibit a set of mannerisms
composed of gestures and vocal inflections to indi-
cate the degree of importance or seriousness that
they attach to portions of their presentations.
• Intensive listening. When you listen to obtain infor-
mation, solve problems, or persuade or dissuade (as
in arguments), you are engaged in intensive listen-
ing. Intensive listening involves greater use of your
analytical ability to proceed through problem-solving
steps. When listening intensively:
{ Become a good summarizer.
{ Trace the development of the discussion and then
move from there to your own analysis.
• Empathetic listening. Empathy occurs when a
person attempts to share another’s feelings or emo-
tions. Counselors attempt to use empathetic listen-
ing in dealing with their clients, and good friends
listen empathetically to each other. Empathy is a
valuable trait developed by people skilled in inter-
personal relations. When you take the time to listen
to another, the courtesy is usually returned. When
listening empathetically:
{ Avoid preoccupation with your own problems.
Talking too much and giving strong nonverbal
signals of disinterest destroy others’ desire to talk.
{ Remember that total empathy can never be achieved
simply because no two people are exactly alike. The
more similar our experiences, however, the better the
opportunity to put ourselves in the other person’s
shoes. Listening with empathy involves some genu-
ine tact along with other good listening habits.
You might have to combine listening intensively and
listening for feelings in some situations. Performance
appraisal interviews, disciplinary conferences, and other
sensitive discussions between supervisors and employees
require listening intensively for accurate understanding
of the message and listening empathetically for feelings,
preconceived points of view, and background.
Bad Listening Habits
Most of us have developed bad listening habits in one
or more of the following areas:
• Faking attention. Have
you ever been introduced
to someone only to realize
30 seconds later that you
missed the name? We can
look directly at a person,
nod, smile, and pretend to
be listening.
• Allowing disruptions. We welcome disruptions of
almost any sort when we are engaged in somewhat
difficult listening. The next time someone enters
your classroom or meeting room, notice how almost
everyone in the room turns away from the speaker
and the topic to observe the latecomer.
• Overlistening. When we attempt to record many
details in writing or in memory we can overlisten and
miss the speaker’s major points.
• Stereotyping. We make spontaneous judgments
about others based on their appearances, manner-
isms, dress, speech delivery, etc. If a speaker doesn’t
meet our standards in these areas, we simply turn
off our listening and assume the speaker can’t have
much to say.
• Dismissing subjects as uninteresting. People tend
to use disinterest as a rationale for not listening.
Unfortunately, the decision is usually made before the
topic is ever introduced. A good way to lose an instruc-
tor’s respect when you have to miss class is to ask,“Are
we going to do anything important in class today?”
• Failing to observe nonverbal aids. To listen effec-
tively, you must observe the speaker. Facial expres-
sions and body motions always accompany speech
and contribute much to messages.
Many bad listening habits develop simply because
the speed of spoken messages is far slower than our abil-
ity to receive and process them. Normal speaking speeds
intensive listening
listening to obtain
information, solve problems,
or persuade or dissuade
empathetic listening
listening to others in an
attempt to share their
feelings or emotions
©
Image
Source
Overlistening
Faking attention
Allowing disruptions
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 26
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 26 1/3/11 8:21:17 AM
1/3/11 8:21:17 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
27
are between 100 and 150 words a minute. The human
ear can actually distinguish words in speech in excess of
500 words a minute, and many people read at speeds
well beyond 500 words a minute. Finally, our minds
process thoughts at thousands of words a minute.
Because individuals can’t speak fast enough to
challenge our ability to listen, listeners have a respon-
sibility to make spoken communication effective. Good
listening typically requires considerable mental and
emotional effort.
Group Communication
A
lthough much of your spoken commu-
nication in business will occur in one-
to-one relationships, another frequent
spoken communication activity will
likely occur when you participate in
groups, committees, and teams.
Increasing Focus on Groups
Developments among U.S. businesses in recent years
have shifted attention away from the employment of
traditional organizational subunits as the only mecha-
nisms for achieving organizational goals and toward
the increased use of groups.
• Flat organizational structures. Many businesses
today are downsizing and eliminating layers of
management. Companies implementing Total Quality
Management programs are reorganizing to dis-
tribute the decision-making power throughout the
organization. The trend is to eliminate functional or
departmental boundaries. Instead, work is reorga-
nized in cross-disciplinary teams that perform broad
core processes (e.g., product development and sales
generation) and not narrow tasks (e.g., forecasting
market demand for a particular product).
In a flat organizational structure, communicating
across the organization chart (among the cross-
disciplinary teams) becomes more important than
communicating up and down in a top-heavy hierar-
chy. An individual can take on an expanded role as
important tasks are assumed. This role can involve
power and authority that surpasses the individual’s
status, or formal position in the organizational
chart. Much of the communication involves face-to-
face meetings with team members rather than numer-
ous, time-consuming “handoffs” as the product
moves methodically from one department to another.
The time needed to design a new card at
Hallmark Cards decreased significantly when the
company adopted a flat organizational structure.
Team members representing the former functional
areas (graphic artists, writers, marketers, and oth-
ers) now work in a central area, communicating
openly and frequently, solving problems and making
decisions about the entire process as a card is being
developed. For example, a writer struggling with a
verse for a new card can solicit immediate input from
the graphic artist working on the team rather than
finalizing the verse and then “handing it off” to the
art department.7
• Heightened Focus on Cooperation. Competition
has been a characteristic way of life in U.S. com-
panies. Organizations and individuals compete for
a greater share of
scarce resources, for
a limited number of
positions at the top of
organizations, and for
esteem in their profes-
sions. Such competi-
tion is a healthy sign
of the human desire
to succeed, and, in
O B J E C T I V E 4
Identify factors affecting
group and team
communication.
role
tasks employees assume
that can involve power and
authority that surpasses
their formal position on the
organization chart
status
one’s formal position in the
organizational chart
Failing to use
nonverbal aids
Dismissing
subject as
uninteresting
C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 27
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 27 1/3/11 8:21:19 AM
1/3/11 8:21:19 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
28 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
Suggestions for Effective Listening
You can enhance the effectiveness of your face-to-face listening by following these
suggestions:
• Minimize environmental and mental distractions.
Take time to listen. Move to a quiet area where you are
not distracted by noise or other conversation. Avoid
becoming so preoccupied with what you will say next
that you fail to listen.
• Get in touch with the speaker. Maintain an open mind
while attempting to understand the speaker’s background,
prejudices, and points of view. Listen for emotionally
charged words and watch for body language, gestures,
facial expressions, and eye movements as clues to the
speaker’s underlying feelings.
• Use your knowledge of speakers to your advantage.
Some people seem to run on and on with details before
making the point. With this speaker, you must anticipate
the major point but not pay much attention to details. Other
speakers give conclusions first and perhaps omit support for
them. In this case, you must ask questions to obtain further
information.
• Let the speaker know you are actively involved. Show
genuine interest by remaining physically and mentally involved;
for example, avoid daydreaming, yawning, frequently breaking
eye contact, looking at your cell phone or papers on your desk,
whispering, etc.
• Do not interrupt the speaker. Try to understand the speaker’s
full meaning, and wait patiently for an indication that you should
enter the conversation.
• Ask reflective questions that assess understanding. Simply
restate in your own words what you think the other person has said.
This paraphrasing will reinforce what you have heard and allow the
speaker to correct any misunderstanding or add clarification.
• Use probing prompts to direct the speaker. Use probing
statements or questions to help the speaker define the issue more
concretely and specifically.
• Use lag time wisely. Listening carefully should be your primary focus;
however, you can think ahead at times as well. Making written or mental
notes allows you to provide useful feedback when the opportunity arises.
If you cannot take notes during the conversation, record important points
as soon as possible so you can summarize the speaker’s key points.
©
Nicole
Hill/Rubberball/Jupiterimages
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 28
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 28 1/3/11 8:21:20 AM
1/3/11 8:21:20 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
terms of economic behavior, competition is funda-
mental to the private enterprise system. At the same
time, when excessive competition replaces the coop-
eration necessary for success, communication can be
diminished, if not eliminated.
Just as you want to look good in the eyes of your
coworkers and supervisors, units within organiza-
tions want to look good to one another. This attitude
can cause behavior to take the competitive form, a
“win/lose” philosophy. When excessive competition
has a negative influence on the performance of the
organization, everyone loses.
Although competition is appropriate and desir-
able in many situations, many companies have
taken steps through open communication and infor-
mation and reward systems to reduce competition
and to increase cooperation. Cooperation is more
likely when the competitors (individuals or groups
within an organization) have an understanding of
and appreciation for others’ importance and func-
tions. This cooperative spirit is characterized as a
“win/win” philosophy. One person’s success is not
achieved at the expense or exclusion of another.
Groups identify a solution that everyone finds sat-
isfactory and is committed to achieving. Reaching
this mutual understanding requires a high degree of
trust and effective interpersonal skills, particularly
empathetic and intensive listening skills, and the
willingness to communicate long enough to agree
on an action plan acceptable to everyone.
Characteristics of Effective Groups
Groupsformforsynergisticeffects;thatis,throughpooling
their efforts, group members can achieve more collectively
than they could individually. At the same time, the social
nature of groups contributes to the individual goals of
members. Communication in small groups leads to group
decisions that are generally superior to individual deci-
sions. The group process can motivate members, improve
thinking, and assist attitude development and change.The
emphasis that a particular group places on task and main-
tenance activities is based on several factors.
As you consider the following factors of group
communication, try to visualize their relationship to the
groups to which you have belonged, such as in school,
religious organizations, athletics, and social activities.
• Common goals. In effective groups, participants share
a common goal, interest, or benefit. This focus on goals
allows members to overcome individual differences of
opinion and to negotiate acceptable solutions.
• Role perception. People who are invited to join
groups have perceptions of how the group should
operate and what it should achieve. In addition, each
member has a self-concept that dictates how he or she
will behave. Those known to be aggressive will attempt
to be confrontational and forceful; those who like to
be known as moderates will behave in moderate ways
by settling arguments rather than initiating them. In
successful groups, members play a variety of necessary
roles and seek to eliminate nonproductive ones.
• Longevity. Groups formed for short-term
tasks, such as arranging a dinner and
program, will spend more time
on the task than on mainte-
nance. However, groups formed
for long-term assignments,
such as an audit of a major
corporation by a team from
a public accounting
firm, may devote
much effort to
Three Teams with
Common Goals
Motorola’s new organizational structure
divides information technology (IT)
staff into three basic teams: “Plan,”
composed of business analysts who
interface with the rest of the business;
“Build,” the application developers;
and “Run,” the maintenance staff. An
unexpected consequence of connecting
the IT staff so tightly to business
partners has been a significant increase
in project activity.8
©
David
Paul
Morris/Bloomberg
via
Getty
Images
s and seek to eliminate nonproductive ones.
ngevity. Groups formed for short-term
ks, such as arranging a dinner and
gram, will spend more time
the task than on mainte-
ce. However, groups formed
long-term assignments,
h as an audit of a major
poration by a team from
ublic accounting
m, may devote
ch effort to
29
C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n
©
iStockphoto.com/Lise
Gagne
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 29
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 29 1/3/11 8:21:21 AM
1/3/11 8:21:21 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
30 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
maintenance goals. Maintenance includes division
of duties, scheduling, record keeping, reporting, and
assessing progress.
• Size. The smaller the group, the more its members
have the opportunity to communicate with each
other. Conversely, large groups often inhibit com-
munication because the opportunity to speak and
interact is limited. When broad input is desired, large
groups can be good. When extensive interaction is
the goal, smaller groups might be more effective.
Interestingly, large groups generally divide into
smaller groups for maintenance purposes, even when
the large group is task oriented.
• Status. Some group members will appear to be
better qualified than others. Consider a group in
which the chief executive of the organization is a
member. When the chief executive speaks, members
agree. When members speak, they tend to direct
their remarks to the one with high status—the chief
executive. People are inclined to communicate with
peers as their equals, but they tend to speak upward
to their supervisor and downward to lower-level
employees. In general, groups require balance in
status and expertise.
• Group norms. A norm is a standard or average
behavior. All groups possess norms. An instruc-
tor’s behavior helps establish classroom norms. If
an instructor is generally late for class, students
will begin to arrive late.
If the instructor permits
talking during lectures, the
norm will be for students
to talk. People conform to norms because con-
formity is easy and nonconformity is difficult and
uncomfortable. Conformity leads to acceptance by
other group members and creates communication
opportunities.
• Leadership. The performance of groups depends
on several factors, but none is more important than
leadership. Some hold the mistaken view that leaders
are not necessary when an organization moves to a
group concept. The role of leaders changes substan-
tially, but they still have an important part to play.
The ability of a group leader to work toward task
goals while contributing to the development of group
and individual goals is often critical to group success.
Leadership activities may be shared among several
participants, and leadership may also be rotated, for-
mally or informally. The leader can establish norms,
determine who can speak and when, encourage
everyone to contribute, and provide the motivation
for effective group activity.9
Group Roles
Groups are made up of members who play a variety
of roles, both positive and negative. Negative roles
detract from the group’s purposes and include the
following:
Perhaps your group experiences have been positive
as a result of members’ playing positive group roles that
promote the group’s purposes:
©
iStockphoto.com/vm
Although much research
has been conducted in
the area of group size,
no optimal number of
members has been
identified. Groups of
five to seven members
are thought to be best
for decision-making
and problem-solving
tasks. An odd number
of members is often
preferred because
decisions are possible
without tie votes.
• Isolate—one who is physically present
but fails to participate
• Dominator—one who speaks too often
and too long
• Free rider—one who does not do his or
her fair share of the work
• Detractor—one who constantly
criticizes and complains
• Digresser—one who deviates from the
group’s purpose
• Airhead—one who is never prepared
• Socializer—one who pursues only the
social aspect of the group
©
Radius
Images/Jupiterimages
norm
a standard or average
behavior
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 30
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 30 1/3/11 8:21:24 AM
1/3/11 8:21:24 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
31
C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n
In healthy groups, members may fulfill multiple
roles, which rotate as the need arises. Negative roles are
extinguished as the group communicates openly about
its goals, strategies, and expectations. The opinions and
viewpoints of all members are encouraged and expected.
From Groups to Teams
Some use the terms group and team interchangeably;
others distinguish between them. The major distinction
between a group and a team is in members’ attitudes
and level of commitment. A team is typified by a clear
identity and a high level of commitment on the part
of members. A variety of strategies has been used for
organizing workers into teams:
• A task force is generally given a single goal and a
limited time to achieve it.
• A quality assurance team, or quality circle, focuses
on product or service quality, and projects can be
either short- or long-term.
• A cross-functional team brings together employees
from various departments to solve a variety of prob-
lems, such as productivity issues, contract estima-
tions and planning, and multidepartment difficulties.
• A product development team concentrates on inno-
vation and the development cycle of new products,
and is usually cross-functional in nature. Consider
the impact of team structures, as illustrated in the
organizational chart in Figure 2-2 on the next page.
While chain of command is still at work in for-
mal organizational relationships and responsibilities,
team structures unite people from varying portions of
the organization. Work teams are typically given the
authority to act on their
conclusions,although the
level of authority varies,
depending on the orga-
nization and the purpose
of the team. Typically,
the group supervisor
retains some responsi-
bilities, some decisions
are made completely by
the team, and the rest are
made jointly.
Merely placing work-
ers into a group does not
make them a functional
team. A group must go
through a developmental
process to begin to func-
tion as a team. The four
stages of team develop-
ment include:
1. forming—becoming
acquainted with
each other and the
assigned task
2. storming—dealing
with conflicting per-
sonalities, goals, and
ideas
3. norming—devel-
oping strategies
and activities that
promote goal
achievement
4. performing—reach-
ing the optimal performance level.
task force
a team of workers that is
generally given a single goal
and a limited time to achieve it
quality assurance team
a team that focuses on product
or service quality; projects can
be either short- or long-term
cross-functional team
a team that brings together
employees from various
departments to solve a variety
of problems
product development
team
usually cross–functional in
nature; a group of employees
who concentrate on innovation
and the development cycle of
new products
forming
stage one of team
development, in which team
members become acquainted
with each other and the
assigned task
storming
stage two of team
development, in which team
members deal with conflicting
personalities, goals, and ideas
norming
stage three of team
development, in which team
members develop strategies
and activities that promote
goal achievement
performing
stage four of team
development, in which team
members reach the optimal
performance level
• Facilitator (also known as
gatekeeper)—one who makes sure
everyone gets to talk and be heard
• Harmonizer—one who keeps tensions
low
• Record keeper—one who maintains
records of events and activities and
informs members
• Reporter—one who assumes
responsibility for preparing materials
for submission
• Leader—one who assumes a directive
role
©
Radius
Images/Jupiterimages
Storming
Norming
Performing
Forming
© Cengage Learning 2010
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 31
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 31 1/3/11 8:21:28 AM
1/3/11 8:21:28 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
32
For a variety of reasons, teams are often unable to
advance through all four stages of development. Even
long-term teams might never reach the optimal per-
forming stage, settling instead for the acceptable per-
formance of the norming stage.
Research into what makes workplace teams
effective indicates that training is beneficial for par-
ticipants in such areas as problem solving, goal
setting, conflict resolution, risk taking, active listen-
ing, and recognizing the interests and achievements
of others. Participants need to be able to satisfy one
another’s basic needs for belonging, personal recogni-
tion, and support. Team members at the performing
stage of team development exhibit the following
behaviors:10
• Commitment. They are focused on the mission,
values, goals, and expectations of the team and the
organization.
• Cooperation. They have a shared sense of purpose,
mutual gain, and teamwork.
• Communication. They
know that informa-
tion must flow smoothly
between top manage-
ment and workers. Team
members are willing to face
confrontation and unpleas-
antness when necessary.
• Contribution. All mem-
bers share their different
backgrounds, skills, and
abilities with the team.
Teams have existed for
hundreds of years through-
out many countries and cul-
tures. Teams are more flexible
than larger organizational
groupings because they can
be assembled, deployed, refo-
cused, and disbanded more
quickly, usually in ways that
enhance rather than disrupt
more permanent structures
and processes.Organizational
changes are often necessary,
however, since support must
be in place for performance
evaluation, recognition, com-
munication, and training sys-
tems. Strategies for bringing
about needed change might
include arranging site visits to similar organizations that
already have teams, bringing in a successful team to speak
to the organization, and bringing in consultants to discuss
the team development process.
Meeting Management
M
eetings are essential for communi-
cation in organizations. They pre-
sent opportunities to acquire and
disseminate valuable information,
develop skills, and make favorable
impressions on colleagues, supervi-
sors, and subordinates.
U.S. businesses spend
more money on con-
ducting meetings than
does any other coun-
try in the world, and
they also spend more
O B J E C T I V E 5
Discuss aspects of
effective meeting
management.
P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
Product
Development
Team
Employee
Relations
Team
Anniversary
Celebration
Task Force
Board of
Directors
Chief
Executive Officer
VP of
Operations
VP of
Information
Technology
VP of
Finance
Networks
Human
Resources
Accounting
Finance
Stockholder
Relations
Marketing
Public
Relations
Communi-
cations
Systems
Design
Figure 2-2 Organizational Chart with Hierarchical and Team Structures
© Cengage Learning 2010
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 32
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 32 1/3/11 8:21:29 AM
1/3/11 8:21:29 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
time in meetings than do people of other countries.11
International meetings are imperative for solid busi-
ness reasons but are facing greater planning scrutiny
because of tightening travel budgets and a recovering
global economy.
Workers frequently have negative attitudes toward
meetings because they perceive they are a waste of time.
Studies support this opinion, revealing that as much as
one-third of the time spent in meetings is unproductive.
Negative attitudes toward meetings can be changed
when meetings are conducted properly, giving attention
to correct procedures and behavior. Successful meetings
don’t just happen; rather, they occur by design. Careful
planning and attention to specific guidelines can help
ensure the success of your meetings, whether they are
conducted in a face-to-face format or electronically.
Face-to-Face Meetings
Face-to-face meetings continue to be the most-used
meeting format in most organizations. They offer dis-
tinct advantages and are appropriate in the following
situations:12
; When you need the richest nonverbal cues, includ-
ing body, voice, proximity, and touch.
; When the issues are especially sensitive.
; When the participants don’t know one another.
; When establishing group rapport and relationships
is crucial.
; When the participants can be in the same place at
the same time.
Face-to-face meetings can be enhanced with the use
of various media tools such as flipcharts, handouts, and
electronic slide decks. While face-to-face meetings pro-
vide a rich nonverbal context and direct human con-
tact, they also have certain limitations. In addition to
the obvious logistical issues of schedules and distance,
face-to-face meetings may be dominated by overly
vocal, quick-to-speak, and high-status members.
Electronic Meetings
Electronic meetings allow companies to reduce travel
budgets, save professional time, and minimize the
environmental impact caused by travel. A variety of
technologies is available to facilitate electronic meet-
ings. Participants may communicate with one another
through telephones, computers, or video broadcast
equipment using groupware or meeting management
software applications. Electronic meetings offer certain
advantages. They facilitate geographically dispersed
groups, because they provide the choice of meeting at
different places/same time, different places/different
times, same place/same time, or same place/different
times. Electronic meetings also speed up meeting follow-
up activities because decisions and action items can be
recorded electronically.
Electronic meetings also have certain limitations:13
• They cannot replace face-to-face contact, especially
when group efforts are just beginning and when
groups are trying to build group values, trust, and
emotional ties.
• They can make it harder to reach consensus, because
more ideas are generated and because it might be
harder to interpret the strength of other members’
commitment to their proposals.
• The success of same-time meetings is dependent on
all participants having excellent keyboarding skills to
engage in rapid-fire, in-depth discussion. This limita-
tion might be overcome as the use of voice input
systems becomes more prevalent.
“U.S. businesses spend more
money on conducting meetings
than does any other country in the
world, and they also spend more
time in meetings than do people of
other countries.”
©
iStockphoto.com/porcorex
C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n 33
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 33
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 33 1/3/11 8:21:33 AM
1/3/11 8:21:33 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
34 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s
Suggestions for Effective Meetings
Whether you engage in face-to-face or electronic meet-
ings, observing the following guidelines can help to
ensure that your meetings are productive:
• Limit meeting length and frequency. Any meeting
held for longer than an hour or more frequently than
once a month should be scrutinized. Ask yourself
whether the meeting is necessary. Perhaps the
purpose can be achieved
in another way, such as
email, instant messaging,
or telephone.
• Make satisfactory
arrangements. Select
a date and time conve-
nient for the majority of
expected participants. For
face-to-face meetings, plan
the meeting site with
consideration for appropriate seating for attendees,
media equipment, temperature and lighting, and nec-
essary supplies. For electronic meetings, check hard-
ware and software and connectivity components.
• Distribute the agenda well in advance. The
agenda is a meeting outline that includes important
information: date, beginning and ending times, place,
topics to be discussed, and responsibilities of those
involved. Having the agenda prior to the meet-
ing allows participants to know what is expected
of them. A sample agenda template is provided in
Figure 2-3.
• Encourage participation. While it is certainly easier
for one person to make decisions, the quality of the
decision making is often improved by involving the
team. Rational decision making may begin with
brainstorming, the generation of many ideas from
among team members. Brainstormed ideas can then
be discussed and ranked, followed by some form of
voting.
agenda
a meeting outline that
includes important
information (e.g., date,
beginning and ending times,
place, topics to be discussed,
and responsibilities of those
involved)
brainstorming
the generation of many ideas
from among team members
Figure 2-3 Formal Generic Agenda for Meetings
Agenda for [name of group] Meeting
Prepared on [date agenda created]
By [name of author of agenda]
Attendees: [those invited to attend, often in alphabetical order]
Date and time of meeting:
Location of meeting:
Subject: [major issues to be discussed or purpose of meeting]
Agenda items:
1. Call to order
2. Routine business [procedural or administrative matters] (10–15 minutes)
a. Approval of agenda for this meeting
b. Reading and approval of minutes of last meeting
c. Committee reports
3. Old business [unfinished matters from previous meeting] (15–20 minutes)
a. Discussion of issue(s) carried over from previous meeting
b. Issue(s) arising from decision(s) made at previous meeting
4. New business (20–25 minutes)
a. Most important issue
b. Next most important issue
c. Other issues in decreasing order of importance
d. Business from the floor not included on the agenda
[only as time permits; otherwise, these issues should be
addressed in the next meeting]
5. Adjournment
© Cengage Learning 2010
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 34
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 34 1/3/11 8:21:34 AM
1/3/11 8:21:34 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
• Maintain order. An organized democratic process
ensures that the will of the majority prevails, the
minority is heard, and group goals are achieved
as expeditiously as possible. Proper parliamentary
procedure may be followed in formal meetings, as
outlined in sources such as Robert’s Rules of Order
and Jones’ Parliamentary Procedure at a Glance. For
less formal meetings, a more relaxed approach may
be taken to ensure that everyone has an opportunity
to share in the decision-making process.
• Manage conflict. In an autocratic organization,
conflict might be avoided because employees are
conditioned to be submissive. Such an environment,
however, leads to smoldering resentment. On the
other hand, conflict is a normal part of any team
effort and can lead to creative discussion and supe-
rior outcomes. Maintaining focus on issues and not
personalities helps ensure that conflict is productive
rather than destructive.
• Seek consensus. While unanimous agreement on
decisions is an optimal outcome, total agreement
cannot always be achieved. Consensus represents
the collective opinion of the group, or the informal
rule that all team members can live with at least 70
percent of what is agreed upon.
• Prepare thorough minutes. Minutes provide a con-
cise record of meeting actions, ensure the tracking
and follow-up of issues from previous meetings, and
assist in the implementation of previously reached
decisions.
Meetings are an important management tool and
are useful for idea exchange. They also provide oppor-
tunities for you, as a meeting participant, to commu-
nicate impressions of power and status. Knowing how
to present yourself and
your ideas and exhibiting
knowledge about correct
meeting management will
assist you in your career
advancement.
consensus
represents the collective opinion
of the group, or the informal rule
that all team members can live
with at least 70 percent of what
is agreed upon
©
iStockphoto.com/Todd
Arena
Face-to-face meetings continue
to be the most-used meeting
format in most organizations.
C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n 35
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 35
27776_ch02_020-035.indd 35 1/3/11 8:21:36 AM
1/3/11 8:21:36 AM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
36 P a r t 2 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n A n a l y s i s
In a report titled “Writing: A Ticket to Work . . . or
a Ticket Out,” the National Commission on Writing
reported that two-thirds of salaried employees in large
companies have some writing responsibilities, and get-
ting hired and promoted in many industries requires
strong writing abilities. While writing is important in
most managerial-level jobs, the Commission also con-
cluded that one-third of employees in corporateAmerica
write poorly. Knowing that effective communication is
tied to the corporate bottom line and many employees
can’t write well, businesses are investing $3.1 billion
annually to train employees to write.1
Remedies are
needed to prevent confusion, waste, errors, lost produc-
tivity, and a damaged corporate image—all caused by
employees, customers, and clients muddling their way
through unreadable messages.
As a capable communicator, you can immediately
add value to your organization and set yourself apart
from your peers who are struggling to articulate ideas in
writing and in presentations. Communication that com-
mands attention and can be understood easily is essen-
tial for survival during the information explosion we are
experiencing today. On the job, you will be expected to
process volumes of available information and shape use-
ful messages that respond to the needs of customers or
clients, coworkers and supervisors, and other key busi-
ness partners. Additionally, increased use of electronic
communication (email, texts, instant messages, blogs,
videoconferences, etc.) will require you to be technologi-
cally savvy and capable of adapting the rules of good
communication to the demands of emerging technology.
How can you learn to plan and prepare powerful
business messages? The systematic analysis process as
outlined in Figure 3-1 will help you develop messages
that save you and your organization valuable time and
O
B
J
E
C
T
I
V
E
S 1 Identify the purpose of the
message and the appropriate
channel.
2 Develop clear perceptions of the
audience to enhance the impact
of the communication and
human relations.
3 Apply techniques for adapting
messages to the audience,
including strategies for
communicating ethically and
responsibly.
4 Recognize the importance of
organizing a message before
writing the first draft.
5 Select the appropriate message
pattern (deductive or inductive)
for developing messages to
achieve the desired response.
BCOM
Communication Analysis
Part 2 Chapter 3
Planning Spoken and
Written Messages
©
iStockphoto.com/Alexandr
Tovstenko
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 36
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 36 1/3/11 3:28:18 PM
1/3/11 3:28:18 PM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
37
C h a p t e r 3 : P l a n n i n g S p o k e n a n d W r i t t e n M e s s a g e s
C H A P T E R 3
©
Hans
Neleman/Stone/Getty
Images
“As a capable communicator, you can immediately
add value to your organization and set yourself
apart from your peers who are struggling to
articulate ideas in writing and in presentations.
”
Figure 3-1 Process for Planning and Preparing Spoken and Written Messages
STEP
1
Determine
the purpose
and select an
appropriate
channel
STEP
2
Envision the
audience
STEP
3
Adapt the
message to the
audience’s
needs and
concerns
STEP
4
Organize the
message
STEP*
5
Prepare the
first draft
STEP*
6
Revise and
proofread for
accuracy and
desired impact
© Cengage Learning 2010
*You will focus on the planning process (Steps 1–4) in this chapter; you will learn to prepare the message in Chapter 4 (Steps 5–6).
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 37
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 37 1/3/11 3:28:32 PM
1/3/11 3:28:32 PM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
P a r t 2 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n A n a l y s i s
resources and portray you
as a capable, energetic pro-
fessional. A thorough analysis of
the audience and your specific com-
munication assignment will empower
you to write a first draft efficiently and to
revise and proofread your message for accuracy,
conciseness, and appropriate tone.
Step 1: Determining the
Purpose and Channel
T
o speak or write effectively, you must
think through what you are trying to say
and understand it thoroughly before you
begin. Ask yourself why you are prepar-
ing the message and what you hope to
accomplish. Is the purpose to get infor-
mation, to answer a
question, to accept an
offer, to deny a request,
to seek support for
a product or idea?
Condense the answers
into a brief sentence
that outlines the pur-
pose for writing or the central idea of your message.You
will use the central idea to organize your message to
achieve the results you desire.
The major purpose of many business messages
is to have the receiver understand logical informa-
tion. Informative messages are used to convey the
vast amounts of information needed to complete
the day-to-day operations of the business—explain
instructions to employees, announce meetings and
procedures, acknowledge orders,
accept contracts for services, and
so forth. Some messages are intended to persuade—
to influence or change the attitudes or actions of the
receiver. These messages include promoting a product
or service and seeking support for ideas and worthy
causes presented to supervisors, employees, stockhold-
ers, customers or clients, and others. You will learn to
prepare messages for each of these purposes.
Step 2: Envisioning
the Audience
P
erception is the part of the communication
process that involves how we look at others
and the world around us. It’s a natural ten-
dency to perceive situations from our own
limited viewpoint. We use the context of
the situation and our five senses to absorb
and interpret the infor-
mation bombarding us
in unique ways.
Individual differ-
ences in perception
account for the varied
and sometimes con-
flicting reports given
by eyewitnesses to the
same accident. Our
senses can be tricked when there is a difference in what
we expect and what really is happening. For example,
consider how your perception affects your ability to
accurately or completely interpret an optical illusion.
Perception of reality is also limited by previous expe-
riences and our attitudes toward the sender of the mes-
sage. We support ideas that are in line with our own and
decide whether to focus on the positive or the negative of
a situation. We may simply refuse to hear a message that
doesn’t fit into our view of the world.
O B J E C T I V E 1
Identify the purpose of
the message and the
appropriate channel.
O B J E C T I V E 2
Develop clear
perceptions of the
audience to enhance
the impact of the
communication and
human relations.
©
iStockphoto.com/Nicolas
Loran
/
©
iStockphoto.com/winterling
/
©
Chapel
Hill
Photography
se the answers
brief sentence
tlines the pur-
r message.You
our message to
ness messages
gical informa-
to convey the
d to complete
iness—explain
meetings and
p g
a situation. We may simply refuse to hear a message that
doesn’t fit into our view of the world.
©
38
resources and portray you
as a capable, energetic pro-
fessional. A thorough analysis of
the audience and your specific com-
munication assignment will empower
you to write a first draft efficiently and to
revise and proofread your message for accuracy,
conciseness, and appropriate tone.
Step 1: Determining the
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 38
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 38 1/3/11 3:28:39 PM
1/3/11 3:28:39 PM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Much of the confusion in communication is caused
by differences in the sender’s and receiver’s perceptions.
For example, a manager’s brief email requesting a status
report on a task may come across as curt to the employ-
ees. Perceptions vary between individuals with similar
backgrounds, and even more so when people from dif-
ferent cultures, generations, and genders communicate.
Overcoming perceptual barriers is difficult but
essential if you are to craft messages that meet the
needs and concerns of your audience. To help you envi-
sion the audience, first focus on relevant information
you know about the receiver. The more familiar you
are with the receiver, the easier this task will be. When
communicating with an individual, you immediately
recall a clear picture of the receiver—his or her physi-
cal appearance, background (education, occupation,
religion, culture), values, opinions, preferences, and so
on. Most importantly, your knowledge of the receiver’s
reaction in similar, previous experiences will aid you
in anticipating how this receiver is likely to react in
the current situation. Consider the following audience
characteristics:
• Age. A message answering an elementary-school
student’s request for information from your company
would not be worded the same as a message answer-
ing a similar request from an adult.
• Economic level. A solicitation for a business dona-
tion for a charity project written to a small business
owner would likely differ from one written to a
representative of a major corporation.
• Educational/occupational background. The tech-
nical jargon and acronyms used in a financial pro-
posal sent to bank loan officers may be inappropriate
in a proposal sent to a group of private investors.
• Needs and concerns of the receiver. Just as suc-
cessful sales personnel begin by identifying the
needs of the prospective buyer, an effective man-
ager attempts to understand the receiver’s frame of
reference as a basis for organizing the message and
developing the content.
• Culture. The vast cultural differences between
people (e.g., language, expressions, cus-
toms, values, and religion) increase the
complexity of the communication
process. An email containing typi-
cal American expressions (e.g., “The
frustration should cool down soon”
and “the competition is backed to
the wall”) would likely confuse a
manager from a different culture.
Differences in values influence
communication styles and mes-
sage patterns. For example, Japanese readers value
the beauty and flow of words and prefer an indirect
writing approach, unlike Americans who prefer clar-
ity and conciseness.2
• Rapport. A sensitive message prepared for a long-
time client may differ significantly from a message
prepared for a newly acquired client. Emails discuss-
ing expectations for completing an assignment may
be briefer and more direct when sent to an employee
with whom you share a strong business relationship
built on mutual trust. The rapport created by previ-
ous dealings with the recipient aids understanding in
a current situation.
• Expectations. Because accountants, lawyers, and
other professionals are expected to meet high stan-
dards, a message from one of them containing errors
in grammar or spelling would likely cause a receiver
to question the credibility of the source.
You may find that envisioning an audience you know
well is often such a conscious action that you may not
even recognize that you are doing it. On the other hand,
envisioning those you do not know well requires addi-
tional effort.In these cases,simply assume an empathetic
attitude toward the receiver to assist you in identifying
his or her frame of reference (knowledge, feelings, and
emotions). In other words, project mentally how you
believe you would feel or react in a similar situation
and use that information to communicate understand-
ing back to the person.
Consider the use (or lack) of empathy in the follow-
ing workplace examples:
be inappropriate
ate investors.
r. Just as suc-
tifying the
fective man-
iver’s frame of
e message and
s between
us-
he
©
UpperCut
Images/Getty
Images
It can be difficult to see
the world as others do.
C h a p t e r 3 : P l a n n i n g S p o k e n a n d W r i t t e n M e s s a g e s 39
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 39
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 39 1/3/11 3:28:47 PM
1/3/11 3:28:47 PM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
40 P a r t 2 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n A n a l y s i s
Sample Message Problem Analysis
Example 1: A U.S.
manager’s instructions
to a new employee from
an Asian culture:
Trying to manufacture a
product with a zero fail-
ure rate would be a train
wreck. We have to strike
the right balance between
customer safety and cost
efficiency. We cannot be
held hostage by threats of
class action lawsuits. Do you
understand?
• The use of expressions
peculiar to U.S.
environment confuse and
intimidate.
• Open-ended question
disregards importance
of saving face to a
person of Asian culture.
Cultural influences may
prevent employee from
asking questions that
might indicate lack of
understanding.
Example 2: An excerpt
from a message sent to
Mr. Sandy Everret:
Ms. Everett:
The wireless iPod kit that
you expressed an interest in
is now available in at your
local car dealer. This innova-
tive Bluetooth technology
can be demonstrated at you
convience. Please call your
local sales representative to
schedule a appointment.
• Misspelling receiver’s
name, misinterpreting
gender, and overlooking
mechanical errors
imply incompetence
or carelessness and
disrespect for receiver.
• Omission of contact
information reduces
writer’s credibility and
shows lack of genuine
concern for sender’s needs.
Taking the time and effort to obtain a strong men-
tal picture of your audience through firsthand knowl-
edge or your empathetic attitude before you write will
enhance your message in the following ways:
1. Establishes rapport and credibility needed to
build long-lasting personal and business relation-
ships. Your receivers will appreciate your attempt
to connect and understand their feelings. A likely
outcome is mutual trust, which can greatly improve
communication and people’s feelings about you, your
ideas, and themselves (as shown in the discussion of
the Johari Window in Chapter 2).
2. Permits you to address the receiver’s needs and
concerns. Such knowledge allows you to select rel-
evant content and to communicate in a suitable style.
3. Simplifies the task of organizing your message.
From your knowledge of yourself and from your
experiences with others, you can reasonably predict
receivers’ reactions to various types of messages. To
illustrate, ask yourself these questions:
• Would I react favorably to a message saying my
request is being granted or that a new client is
genuinely pleased with a job I’d just completed?
• Would I experience a feeling of disappointment
when I learn that my request has been refused or
that my promised pay raise is being postponed?
• Would I need compelling arguments to convince
me to purchase a new product or support a new
company policy?
Now, reread the questions as though you were the
message recipient. Because you know your answers,
you can predict others’ answers with some degree of
accuracy. Such predictions are possible because of com-
monality in human behavior.
Your commitment to identifying the needs and
concerns of your audience before you communicate
is invaluable in today’s workplace. Organizations
must focus on providing quality customer service and
developing work environments supportive of talented,
diverse workers. Alienating valuable customers and tal-
ented employees as a result of poor audience analysis is
not an option in today’s competitive environment.
Step 3: Adapting the
Message to the Audience
A
fter you have envisioned your audience,
you are ready to adapt your message to
fit the specific needs of your audience.
Adaptations include focusing on the
receiver’s point of view; communicat-
ing ethically and responsibly; building
and protecting good-
will; using simple, con-
temporary language;
writing concisely; and
projecting a positive,
tactful tone.
Focus on the
Receiver’s
Point of View
Ideas are more interesting and appealing if they are
expressed from the receiver’s viewpoint. Developing
a “you attitude” rather than a “me attitude” involves
thinking in terms of the other person’s interests and
trying to see a problem from the other’s point of view.
A letter, memo, email, or phone call reflecting a “you
O B J E C T I V E 3
Apply techniques for
adapting messages
to the audience,
including strategies for
communicating ethically
and responsibly.
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 40
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 40 1/3/11 3:28:50 PM
1/3/11 3:28:50 PM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
attitude” sends a direct signal of sincere concern for the
receiver’s needs and interest.
The use of the word you (appropriately used) con-
veys to receivers a feeling that messages are specifically
for them. However, if the first-person pronoun I is used
frequently, especially as the subject, the sender may
impress others as being self-centered—always talking
about self. Compare the following examples of sender-
centered and receiver-centered statements:
“I”- or Sender-
Centered
“You”- or
Receiver-Centered
I want to take this
opportunity to offer my
congratulations on your
recent promotion to
regional manager
Congratulations on your
recent promotion to
regional manager.
We charge customers a 12
percent annual finance
charge on past-due
invoices.
Customers pay a 12
percent annual finance
charge only on past-
due invoices. (You could
be the subject in a
message to a customer.)
Compliments (words of deserved praise) are
another effective way of increasing a receiver’s recep-
tiveness to ideas that follow. Give sincere compli-
ments judiciously as they can do more harm than
good if paid at the wrong time, in the wrong setting,
inthepresenceofthewrongpeople,orforthewrong
reasons. Likewise, avoid flattery (words of unde-
served praise). Although the recipient may accept
your flattery as a sincere compliment, it is more
likely that the recipient will interpret your unde-
served praise as an attempt to seek to gain favor
or special attention. Suspicion of your motive
makes effective communication less likely.
Communicate Ethically
and Responsibly
The familiar directive “with power comes
responsibility” applies especially to your use
of communication skills. Because business
communication affects the lives of many,
you must accept responsibility for using it
to uphold your own personal values and
your company’s standards of ethical con-
duct. Before speaking or writing, use the
following guidelines to help you communicate ethically
and responsibly.
• Is the information stated as truthfully, honestly,
and fairly as possible? Good communicators recog-
nize that ensuring a free flow of essential information
is in the interest of the public and the organization.
Merck, the manufacturer of the prescription pain
reliever Vioxx, was sued by thousands of patients
and patients’ families for withholding information
about known heart risks associated with taking the
drug.3
Similarly, failure to report the nature of his
investment practices led to the arrest of the accoun-
tant of Bernard Madoff, the man who admittedly
cheated thousands of investors out of billions of
dollars in an illegal scheme. The SEC has accused
Madoff’s accountant, David Friehling, of lying to the
American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
rather than subject his audit work to peer review.4
Your honor, honesty, and credibility will build strong,
How to Cultivate a “You Attitude”
To cultivate a “you attitude,” concentrate on the
following questions:
• Does the message address the receiver’s major
needs and concerns?
• Would the receiver feel this message is
receiver-centered? Is the receiver kept clearly
in the picture?
• Will the receiver perceive the ideas to be fair,
logical, and ethical?
• Are ideas expressed clearly and concisely
(to avoid lost time, money, and possible
embarrassment caused when messages are
misunderstood)?
• Does the message promote positive business
relationships—even when the message is
negative? For example, are please, thank you,
and other courtesies used when appropriate?
Are ideas stated tactfully and positively and
in a manner that preserves the receiver’s self-
worth and cultivates future business?
• Is the message sent promptly and through
the preferred channel to indicate courtesy?
• Does the message reflect the high
standards of a business professional:
accurate and appealing document design,
quality printing, and absence of misspellings and
grammatical errors?
41
C h a p t e r 3 : P l a n n i n g S p o k e n a n d W r i t t e n M e s s a g e s
©
Radius
Images/Jupiterimages
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 41
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 41 1/3/11 3:28:53 PM
1/3/11 3:28:53 PM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
42 P a r t 2 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n A n a l y s i s
long-lasting relationships and lead to the long-term
success of your company. Sending complete, accu-
rate, and timely information regardless of whether it
supports your interests will help you build credibility.
• Does the message embellish or exaggerate the
facts? Legal guidelines related to advertising provide
clear guidance for avoiding fraud, the misrepresen-
tation of products or services; however, overzeal-
ous sales representatives or imaginative writers can
use language skillfully to create less-than-accurate
perceptions in the minds of receivers. Businesses
have learned the hard way that overstating the
capabilities of a product or service (promising more
than can be delivered) is not good for business in
the long run. Researchers are at times tempted to
overstate their findings to ensure continued fund-
ing or greater publicity. Eric T. Peohlman, a medical
researcher, acknowledged that while at the University
of Vermont he fabricated data in 17 applications for
federal grants to make his work seem more promis-
ing. Under a plea agreement, he was barred for life
from receiving federal funding and had to pay back
$180,000, as well as asking scientific journals to
retract and correct 10 articles he had authored.5
While surveys indicate many job seekers believe
companies expect résumé padding, companies repeat-
edly report that this perception is not true. Marilee
Jones, dean of admissions at Massachusetts Institute
of Technology, and David Edmonson, the former
CEO of Radio Shack, resigned high-profile jobs for
misstating their academic records. George O’Leary
stepped down five days after been named head
football coach at Notre Dame, admitting he lied
about receiving a master’s degree and playing college
football.6
Skill in communicating persuasively will be impor-
tant throughout your profession. The techniques you
will read about in this text, such as those related to
writing a winning résumé and application message,
will be helpful as you begin your career; however,
these techniques should not be used if your motive is
to exploit the receiver.
• Are the ideas expressed clearly and understand-
ably? If a message is to be seen as honest, you
must be reasonably confident that the receiver can
understand it. Ethical communicators select words
that convey the exact meaning intended and that are
within the reader’s vocabulary.
• Is your viewpoint supported with objective facts?
Are facts accurately docu-
mented to allow the reader
to judge the credibility of
the source and to give credit
where credit is due? Can
opinions be clearly distin-
guished from facts? Have you evaluated honestly
any real or perceived conflict of interest that could
prevent you from preparing an unbiased message?
• Are ideas stated with tact and consideration that
preserves the receiver’s self-worth? The meta-
phor “An arrow, once it is shot, cannot be recalled”
describes the irrevocable damage caused by cruel or
unkind words.7
Ego-destroying criticism, excessive
anger, sarcasm, hurtful nicknames, betrayed secrets,
rumors, and malicious gossip pose serious ethical
problems in the workplace because they can ruin
reputations, humiliate, and damage a person’s
self-worth. Serious legal issues arise when negative
statements are false, constituting defamation. Written
defamatory remarks are referred to as libel, and
similar spoken remarks are referred to as slander.
If you choose to make negative statements about a
person, be sure the facts in question are supported.
Additionally, you’ll hone your abilities to convey neg-
ative information and to handle sensitive situations
in a constructive, timely manner rather than ignoring
them until they are out of control. For considerate,
fair, and civilized use of words, follow this simple
rule: Communicate with and about others with the
same kindness and fairness that you wish others to
use when communicating with and about you.
• Are graphics carefully designed to avoid distort-
ing facts and relationships? Communicating ethi-
cally involves reporting data as clearly and accurately
as possible. Misleading graphics result either from
the developers’ deliberate attempt to confuse the
audience or from their lack of expertise in con-
structing ethical graphics.
libel
written defamatory remarks
slander
spoken defamatory remarks
©
iStockphoto.com/Anton
Vakhlachev
Communication’s Golden Rule
Communicate with and about
others with the same kindness
and fairness that you wish
others to use when
communicating with
and about you.
ing facts and relationships? Communicating ethi-
cally involves reporting data as clearly and accurately
as possible. Misleading graphics result either from
the developers’ deliberate attempt to confuse the
audience or from their lack of expertise in con-
structing ethical graphics.
©
iStockpho
Communication’s Golden Rule
Communicate with and about
others with the same kindness
and fairness that you wish
others to use when
communicating with
and about you.
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 42
27776_ch03_036-055.indd 42 1/3/11 3:29:04 PM
1/3/11 3:29:04 PM
Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s).
Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
Another random document with
no related content on Scribd:
Some obvious minor typographical and punctuation
errors have been corrected silently.
List of Illustrations: illustration numbers have been
added. Illustrations numbers 33 (originally
Kingfisher) and 34 (originally Carron)
interchanged cf. the order of the illustrations in
the text; ditto for numbers 44 (Cambria) and 45
(Marylebone), numbers 51 (Dieppe) and 52
(United Kingdom), and numbers 94 (Campania)
and 95 (Mauretania).
Perier and Périer have been standardised to Périer.
Page 65: ... to bring up in Ramsay Bay ... has been
changed to ... to bring up in Ramsey Bay ....
Page 86: ſatisfying has been changed to ſatiſfying.
Page 118: Konisberg has been changed to
Königsberg.
Page 187: Miller and Ravenhall has been changed to
Miller and Ravenhill.
Page 320: Dupuy de Lome has been changed to
Dupuy de Lôme.
Index entries changed to conform to the text: Belier
to Bélier; Bernouilli to Bernoulli; Browne, Charles
to Brownne, Charles; Cambia (Cunard Co.) and
Cambia (L. & N.W.R.) to Cambria (Cunard Co.)
and Cambria (L. & N.W.R.) (ships); Chipping
Camden to Chipping Campden (entry Freeman,
Mr.); Dupuy de Lome to Dupuy de Lôme; Fire-
brand to Firebrand (ship); Grayson & Leadly to
Grayson & Leadley; Humbolt to Humboldt (ship);
Jorden, J., & Co. to Jordan, J., & Co.; Jouffrey
d’Abbans to Jouffroy d’Abbans; Jumma to Jumna
(ship); Liffy to Liffey (ship); Maudsley, Sons &
Field to Maudslay, Sons & Field; Morisot’s “Orbis
Maritimi,” to Morisotus’ “Orbis Maritimi,”; Munroe,
President to Monroe, President (also moved to
proper place); Prince Regent Luitpold to Prinz
Regent Luitpold (ship); Rubic and Blaker to Rubie
and Blaker; James Rumsey to James Rumsay
(entry Moray, John); Salamon de Caus to Salomon
de Caus (entry Steam-engines); Sans Pariel to
Sans Pareil (ship); Shaw, Savil & Albion Co. to
Shaw, Savill & Albion Co.; Winan’s cigar ship to
Winans’ cigar ship.
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK STEAM-SHIPS ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions
will be renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S.
copyright law means that no one owns a United States
copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and you!) can copy
and distribute it in the United States without permission and
without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth in the
General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying and
distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if
you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of the
trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the
Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such
as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research. Project Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and
printed and given away—you may do practically ANYTHING in
the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S. copyright
law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, especially
commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the
free distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this
work (or any other work associated in any way with the phrase
“Project Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of
the Full Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or
online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and
Redistributing Project Gutenberg™
electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand,
agree to and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual
property (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree
to abide by all the terms of this agreement, you must cease
using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for
obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms
of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only
be used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by
people who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.
There are a few things that you can do with most Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works even without complying with the
full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There
are a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg™
electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement and
help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™
electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the
collection of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the
individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the
United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright
law in the United States and you are located in the United
States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from copying,
distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project
Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope that you will
support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting free
access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™
works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the
work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement
by keeping this work in the same format with its attached full
Project Gutenberg™ License when you share it without charge
with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also
govern what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most
countries are in a constant state of change. If you are outside
the United States, check the laws of your country in addition to
the terms of this agreement before downloading, copying,
displaying, performing, distributing or creating derivative works
based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg™ work. The
Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright
status of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project
Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must
appear prominently whenever any copy of a Project
Gutenberg™ work (any work on which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed,
viewed, copied or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United
States and most other parts of the world at no cost and
with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it,
give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project
Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United
States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is
derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of
the copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to
anyone in the United States without paying any fees or charges.
If you are redistributing or providing access to a work with the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of
paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use
of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ trademark as set forth
in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is
posted with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and
distribution must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through
1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed by the copyright holder.
Additional terms will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™
License for all works posted with the permission of the copyright
holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project
Gutenberg™ License terms from this work, or any files
containing a part of this work or any other work associated with
Project Gutenberg™.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute
this electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1
with active links or immediate access to the full terms of the
Project Gutenberg™ License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form,
including any word processing or hypertext form. However, if
you provide access to or distribute copies of a Project
Gutenberg™ work in a format other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or
other format used in the official version posted on the official
Project Gutenberg™ website (www.gutenberg.org), you must,
at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy,
a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy
upon request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or
other form. Any alternate format must include the full Project
Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™
works unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or
providing access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™
electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive
from the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the
method you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The
fee is owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark,
but he has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to
the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty
payments must be paid within 60 days following each date on
which you prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your
periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked
as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information
about donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who
notifies you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt
that s/he does not agree to the terms of the full Project
Gutenberg™ License. You must require such a user to return or
destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in
the electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90
days of receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different
terms than are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain
permission in writing from the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project Gutenberg™
trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on,
transcribe and proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright
law in creating the Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these
efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium
on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data,
transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual property
infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be
read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in
paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark,
and any other party distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic
work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to you for
damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of
receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you
paid for it by sending a written explanation to the person you
received the work from. If you received the work on a physical
medium, you must return the medium with your written
explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu
of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.
If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund
in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set
forth in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’,
WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this
agreement violates the law of the state applicable to this
agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the
maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable
state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of
this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the
Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the
Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any
volunteers associated with the production, promotion and
distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless
from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you
do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project
Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or
deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any Defect
you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission
of Project Gutenberg™
Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new
computers. It exists because of the efforts of hundreds of
volunteers and donations from people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project
Gutenberg™’s goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™
collection will remain freely available for generations to come. In
2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was
created to provide a secure and permanent future for Project
Gutenberg™ and future generations. To learn more about the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your
efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the
Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-
profit 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the
laws of the state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status
by the Internal Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or
federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. Contributions
to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and
your state’s laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500
West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact
links and up to date contact information can be found at the
Foundation’s website and official page at
www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to
the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without
widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission
of increasing the number of public domain and licensed works
that can be freely distributed in machine-readable form
accessible by the widest array of equipment including outdated
equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly
important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws
regulating charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of
the United States. Compliance requirements are not uniform
and it takes a considerable effort, much paperwork and many
fees to meet and keep up with these requirements. We do not
solicit donations in locations where we have not received written
confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or determine
the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states
where we have not met the solicitation requirements, we know
of no prohibition against accepting unsolicited donations from
donors in such states who approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot
make any statements concerning tax treatment of donations
received from outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp
our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current
donation methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a
number of other ways including checks, online payments and
credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About
Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could
be freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose
network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several
printed editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by
copyright in the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus,
we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any
particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
facility: www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new
eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter to hear
about new eBooks.

Immediate download BCOM 3 Business Communication 3rd Edition Carol M. Lehman ebooks 2024

  • 1.
    Full download ebookat ebookname.com BCOM 3 Business Communication 3rd Edition Carol M. Lehman https://ebookname.com/product/bcom-3-business- communication-3rd-edition-carol-m-lehman/ OR CLICK BUTTON DOWLOAD NOW Download more ebook from https://ebookname.com
  • 2.
    More products digital(pdf, epub, mobi) instant download maybe you interests ... Buruli Ulcer Linda Lehman https://ebookname.com/product/buruli-ulcer-linda-lehman/ The Responsible Business Reimagining Sustainability and Success 1st Edition Carol Sanford https://ebookname.com/product/the-responsible-business- reimagining-sustainability-and-success-1st-edition-carol-sanford/ Chemistry of High Energy Materials 3 ed 3rd Edition Klapötke Thomas M. https://ebookname.com/product/chemistry-of-high-energy- materials-3-ed-3rd-edition-klapotke-thomas-m/ Effective Business Communication in Organisations Preparing Messages that Communicate 4th Edition Fielding M L Du Plooy-Cilliers F https://ebookname.com/product/effective-business-communication- in-organisations-preparing-messages-that-communicate-4th-edition- fielding-m-l-du-plooy-cilliers-f/
  • 3.
    Foundations of LegalResearch and Writing Carol M. Bast https://ebookname.com/product/foundations-of-legal-research-and- writing-carol-m-bast/ Communication Skills 3rd Edition Infobase Publishing https://ebookname.com/product/communication-skills-3rd-edition- infobase-publishing/ Essentials of Business Communication Seventh Edition Mary Ellen Guffey https://ebookname.com/product/essentials-of-business- communication-seventh-edition-mary-ellen-guffey/ Business Communication Process Product Seventh Edition Mary Ellen Guffey https://ebookname.com/product/business-communication-process- product-seventh-edition-mary-ellen-guffey/ An Introduction to Political Communication 3rd Edition Communication and Society Brian Mcnair https://ebookname.com/product/an-introduction-to-political- communication-3rd-edition-communication-and-society-brian-mcnair/
  • 5.
    This is anelectronic version of the print textbook. Due to electronic rights restrictions, some third party content may be suppressed. Editorial review has deemed that any suppres ed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. The publisher reserves the right to remove content from this title at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it. For valuable information on pricing, previous editions, changes to current editions, and alternate formats, please visit www.cengage.com/highered to search by ISBN#, author, title, or keyword for materials in your areas of interest. s Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 6.
    reviewcard/ © 2012 CengageLearning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part. C H A P T E R 1 E S TA B L I S H I N G A F R A M E W O R K F O R B U S I N E S S C O M M U N I C AT I O N Key Terms Chronemics the study of how a culture perceives time and its use Decoding the process of interpreting a message Diversity skills the ability to communi- cate effectively with both men and women of all ages, cultures, and minority groups Downward communication a type of communication that flows from supervisor to employee, from policy makers to operating personnel, or from top to bottom on the organization chart Encoding the process of selecting and organizing a message Ethics the principles of right and wrong that guide one in making decisions that consider the impact of one’s actions on others as well as on the decision maker Ethnocentrism the assumption that one’s own cultural norms are the right way to do things External messages messages directed to recipients outside the organization Feedback a receiver’s response to a sender’s message Formal communication channel a channel of communication typified by the formal organization chart; dictated by the technical, political, and economic environ- ment of the organization Grapevine the best-known component of the informal communication system Horizontal (or lateral) communica- tion interactions between organizational units on the same hierarchical level Informal communication channel a channel of communication that continu- ously develops as people interact within the formal system to accommodate their social and psychological needs Interferences also called barriers; numer- ous factors that hinder the communication process Internal messages messages intended for recipients within the organization Kinesics the study of body language, which is not universal, but instead is learned from one’s culture Organizational communication the movement of information within the com- pany structure Learning Objectives LO1 : Define communication and describe the value of communication in business. Communication is the process of exchanging information and meaning between or among individuals through a common system of symbols, signs, and behavior. Managers spend most of their time in communication activities. LO2 : Explain the communication process model and the ultimate objective of the communication process. People engaged in communication encode and decode messages while simultaneously serving as both senders and receivers. In the communication process, feedback helps people resolve possible misunderstandings and thus improves communication effectiveness. Feedback and the opportunity to observe nonverbal signs are always present in face-to-face communication, the most complete of the three communication levels. LO3 : Discusshowinformationflowsinanorganization. Both formal and informal communication systems exist in every organization; the formal system exists to accomplish tasks, and the informal system serves a personal maintenance purpose that results in people feeling better about themselves and others. Communication flows upward, downward, and horizontally or laterally. These flows often defy formal graphic description, yet each is a necessary part of the overall communication activity of the organization. Communication takes place at five levels: intrapersonal (communication within one person), interpersonal (communication between two people), group (communication among more than two people), organizational (communication among combinations of groups), and public (communication from one entity to the greater public). S E N D E R R E C E I V E R Encodes Message Encodes Message Decodes Message Decodes Message Selects Channel & Transmits Message Selects Channel & Transmits Message I N T E R F E R E N C E S s UPWARD COMMUNICATION Progress reports (spoken and written) • Results/accomplishments • Problems/clarifications UPWARD COMMUNICATION Ideas/suggestions Feelings/attitudes HORIZONTAL OR LATERAL COMMUNICATION Coordination of interrelated activities Problem-solving efforts DOWNWARD COMMUNICATION Policies and procedures Organizational goals and strategies Work assignments Employee development • Job role/responsibility • Performance appraisal (formal and informal) • Constructive criticism • Deserved praise and recognition © 2012 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part. BCOM3_SE cards.indd 3 12/27/10 2:08:50 PM M o r e r e v i e w t o o l s a t C o u r s e M a t e f o r B C O M 3 . L o g i n a t w w w . c e n g a g e b r a i n . c o m . Proxemics the study of cultural space requirements Stakeholders people inside and outside the organization who are affected by decisions Stereotypes mental pictures that one group forms of the main characteristics of another group, creating preformed ideas of what people in this group are like Synergy a situation in which the whole is greater than the sum of the parts Team a small number of people with complementary skills who work together for a common purpose Telecommuting also called teleworking; working at home or other remote locations and sending and receiving work from the company office electronically Upward communication a type of com- munication that is generally a response to requests from supervisors LO4 : Explain how legal and ethical constraints, diversity challenges, changing technology, and team environment act as strategic forces that influence the process of business communication. Communication occurs within an environment constrained by legal and ethical requirements, diversity challenges, changing technology, and team environment requirements. • International, federal, state, and local laws impose legal boundaries for business activity, and ethical boundaries are determined by personal analysis that can be assisted by application of various frameworks for decision making. • Communication is critically impacted by diversity in nationality, culture, age, gender, and other factors that offer tremendous opportunities to maximize talent, ideas, and productivity but pose significant challenges in interpretation of time, personal space requirements, body language, and language translation. • Significant strides have occurred in the development of tools for data collection and analysis, creation of messages that are clearer and more effective, and quick and easy communication with audiences in remote locations. The use of technology, however, poses legal and ethical concerns in regard to ownership, access, and privacy. • Team environment challenges arise because communication in teams differs from communication in traditional organizational structures. The result of effective teams is better decisions, more creative solutions to problems, and higher worker morale. 1. You must learn to design spreadsheets that make financial information meaningful to users. 2. Many online tools are available that build relationships with customers. 3. I am submitting an employee testimonial, which I first posted to a presentations blog, to the company website. 4. More companies are videoconferencing because of the need to reduce travel costs significantly. 5. You must perform periodic maintenance on your computer to keep it operating efficiently. 6. Planned store improvements include widening the aisles, improving lighting, and lowering shelves for a sophisticated feel. or Planned store improvements include widened aisles, improved lighting, and lowered shelves for a sophisticated feel. Grammar Quiz Sentence Structure Identify the weakness in each sentence and write an improved version. 1. It is essential that you learn to design spreadsheets that make financial information meaningful to users. 2. There are many online tools available that build relationships with customers. 3. I am submitting an employee testimonial to the company website, which I first posted to a presentation blog. 4. More companies are videoconferencing because of the need to significantly reduce travel costs. 5. To operate efficiently, you must perform periodic maintenance on your computer. 6. Planned store improvements include widening the aisles, improved lighting, and lower shelves for a sophisticated feel. Grammar Quiz Solutions Chapter In Review Cards in the back of the Student Edition provide students a portable study tool containing all of the pertinent information for class preparation. Engaging. Trackable. Affordable. CourseMate brings course concepts to life with interactive learning, study, and exam preparation tools that support BCOM3. FOR STUDENTS: • Interactive eBook • Chapter Quizzes • Assignments & Handouts • E-Lectures • Cases • Chapter In Review Cards • Flashcards (electronic & printable) • Games (crossword puzzles & quiz bowl) • Glossary • Learning Objectives • PowerPoint® • Videos • Grammar Games • Style Guides • Templates • Model Documents • Language Review Quizzes FOR INSTRUCTORS: • First Day of Class Instructions • Custom Options through 4LTR+ Program • Instructor’s Manual • Test Bank • PowerPoint® Slides • Instructor Prep Cards • Engagement Tracker S T U D E N T T E S T E D , F A C U L T Y A P P R O V E D THE SOLUTION ONLINE RESOURCES INCLUDED! Students sign in at www.cengagebrain.com 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd i 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd i 1/4/11 11:44:09 AM 1/4/11 11:44:09 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 7.
    BCOM3 2011–2012 Edition CarolM. Lehman Debbie D. DuFrene Vice President of Editorial, Business: Jack W. Calhoun Editor-in-Chief: Melissa Acuña Acquisitions Editor: Erin Joyner Developmental Editor: Dana Freeman, B-books, Ltd. Product Developmental Manager, 4LTR Press: Steven E. Joos Executive Brand Marketing Manager, 4LTR Press: Robin Lucas Editorial Assistant: Kayti Purkiss VP/Director of Marketing: Cheryl Costantini Marketing Manager: Michelle Lockard Marketing Coordinator: Leigh Smith Sr. Marketing Communications Manager: Sarah Greber Production Director: Amy McGuire, B-books, Ltd. Content Project Manager: Darrell Frye Media Editor: John Rich Frontlist Buyer, Manufacturing: Miranda Klapper Production Service: B-books, Ltd. Art Director: Stacy Jenkins Shirley Internal Designer: KeDesign, Mason, OH Cover Designer: KeDesign, Mason, OH Cover Image: © Getty Images/Blend Images/Anderson Ross Photo Rights Acquisitions Specialist: Deanna Ettinger Photo Researcher: Charlotte Goldman © 2012, © 2011 South-Western, a part of Cengage Learning ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the copyright herein may be reproduced, transmitted, stored, or used in any form or by any means graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including but not limited to photocopying, recording, scanning, digitizing, taping, web distribution, infor- mation networks, or information storage and retrieval systems, except as permitted under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, without the prior written permission of the publisher. For product information and technology assistance, contact us at Cengage Learning Customer & Sales Support, 1-800-354-9706 For permission to use material from this text or product, submit all requests online at www.cengage.com/permissions Further permissions questions can be emailed to [email protected] Library of Congress Control Number: 2010942121 SE ISBN-13: 978-1-111-52777-8 SE ISBN-10: 1-111-52777-6 South-Western 5191 Natorp Boulevard Mason, OH 45040 USA Cengage Learning products are represented in Canada by Nelson Education, Ltd. For your course and learning solutions, visit www.cengage.com Purchase any of our products at your local college store or at our preferred online store www.CengageBrain.com Printed in the United States of America 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15 14 13 12 11 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd ii 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd ii 1/4/11 11:44:19 AM 1/4/11 11:44:19 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 8.
    iii Communication Foundations 2 1Establishing a Framework for Business Communication 2 2 Focusing on Interpersonal and Group Communication 20 Communication Analysis 36 3 Planning Spoken and Written Messages 36 4 Preparing Spoken and Written Messages 56 Communication Through Voice, Electronic, and Written Messages 70 5 Communicating Electronically 70 6 Delivering Good- and Neutral-News Messages 84 7 Delivering Bad-News Messages 102 8 Delivering Persuasive Messages 122 Communication Through Reports and Business Presentations 140 9 Understanding the Report Process and Research Methods 140 10 Managing Data and Using Graphics 160 11 Organizing and Preparing Reports and Proposals 172 12 Designing and Delivering Business Presentations 194 Communication for Employment 216 13 Preparing Résumés and Application Messages 216 14 Interviewing for a Job and Preparing Employment Messages 244 GRAMMAR AND USAGE APPENDIX 260 REFERENCES 275 INDEX 278 Brief Contents 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd iii 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd iii 1/4/11 11:44:24 AM 1/4/11 11:44:24 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 9.
    Contents Part 1 Communication Foundations2 1 Establishing a Framework for Business Communication 2 Value of Communication 2 The Communication Process 3 The Sender Encodes the Message 4 The Sender Selects the Channel and Transmits the Message 4 The Receiver Decodes the Message 4 The Receiver Encodes the Message to Clarify 5 Interferences Hinder the Process 5 Communicating within Organizations 5 Communication Flow in Organizations 5 Levels of Communication 9 Strategic Forces Influencing Business Communication 10 Strategic Force 1: Legal and Ethical Constraints 10 Strategic Force 2: Diversity Challenges 13 Strategic Force 3: Changing Technology 15 Strategic Force 4: Team Environment 17 2 Focusing on Interpersonal and Group Communication 20 Behavioral Theories that Impact Communication 20 Recognizing Human Needs 20 Stroking 22 Exploring the Johari Window 22 Contrasting Management Styles 23 Nonverbal Communication 23 Metacommunication 23 Kinesic Messages 23 Understanding Nonverbal Messages 24 Listening as a Communication Skill 25 Listening for a Specific Purpose 25 Bad Listening Habits 26 Group Communication 27 Increasing Focus on Groups 27 Characteristics of Effective Groups 29 Group Roles 30 From Groups to Teams 31 Meeting Management 32 Face-to-Face Meetings 33 Electronic Meetings 33 Suggestions for Effective Meetings 34 Part 2 Communication Analysis 36 3 Planning Spoken and Written Messages 36 Step 1: Determining the Purpose and Channel 38 Step 2: Envisioning the Audience 38 Step 3: Adapting the Message to the Audience 40 Focus on the Receiver’s Point of View 40 Communicate Ethically and Responsibly 41 Build and Protect Goodwill 43 Use Contemporary Language 47 Use Simple, Informal Words 47 Communicate Concisely 48 Project a Positive,TactfulTone 49 Step 4: Organizing the Message 52 Outline to Benefit the Sender and the Receiver 52 Sequence Ideas to Achieve Desired Goals 52 4 Preparing Spoken and Written Messages 56 Prepare the First Draft 56 Craft Powerful Sentences 58 Develop Coherent Paragraphs 60 Revise and Proofread 62 Improve Readability 62 Apply Visual Enhancements to Improve Readability 63 Use Systematic Procedures for Revising and Proofreading 66 Cultivate a Frame of Mind for Effective Revising and Proofreading 68 on se 25 27 ups 29 y 41 C o n t e n t s iv 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd iv 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd iv 1/4/11 11:44:35 AM 1/4/11 11:44:35 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 10.
    v C o nt e n t s Part 3 Communication Through Voice, Electronic, and Written Messages 70 5 Communicating Electronically 70 Electronic Mail Communication 70 Advantages of Email 70 Guidelines for Preparing Email Messages 71 Effective Use of Email 72 Instant Messaging 74 Text Messaging 75 Electronic Messages and the Law 77 Web Page Communication 78 Writing for a Website 78 Writing Wikis 79 Writing for Weblogs 79 Voice and Wireless Communication 80 Voice Mail Communication 80 Cell Phone Communication 81 Wireless Communication and the Future 82 Appropriate Use of Technology 82 Determine the Purpose of the Message 83 Determine Whether the Information Is Personal or Confidential 83 Decide Whether Positive Human Relations Are Sacrificed 83 6 Delivering Good- and Neutral-News Messages 84 Deductive Organizational Pattern 84 Good-News Messages 86 Positive News 86 Thank-You and Appreciation Messages 88 Routine Claims 90 Claim Message 90 Favorable Response to a Claim Message 90 Routine Requests 93 Routine Request 93 Favorable Response to a Routine Request 93 Positive Response to a Favor Request 93 Form Messages for Routine Responses 95 Routine Messages about Orders and Credit 95 Acknowledging Customer Orders 97 Providing Credit Information 97 Extending Credit 98 Procedural Messages 100 7 Delivering Bad-News Messages 102 Choosing an Appropriate Channel and Organizational Pattern 102 Channel Choice and Commitment to Tact 102 Use of the Inductive Approach to Build Goodwill 104 Exceptions to the Inductive Approach 105 Developing a Bad-News Message 105 Writing the Introductory Paragraph 105 Presenting the Facts, Analysis, and Reasons 106 Writing the Bad-News Statement 107 Offering a Counterproposal or“Silver Lining”Idea 108 Closing Positively 108 Refusing a Request 110 Denying a Claim 111 Denying Credit 113 Delivering Constructive Criticism 115 Communicating Negative Organizational News 116 Breaking Bad News 116 Responding to Crisis Situations 118 8 Delivering Persuasive Messages 122 Persuasion Strategies 122 Plan Before You Write 123 Use the Inductive Approach 124 Apply Sound Writing Principles 124 Sales Messages 126 Gain Attention 126 Generate Interest by Introducing the Product, Service, or Idea 127 Create Desire by Providing Convincing Evidence 128 Motivate Action 131 Persuasive Requests 132 Making a Claim 132 Asking a Favor 135 Requesting Information 137 Persuading within an Organization 137 0 2 d the Law 77 ional tment ch to 2 h 124 iples 124 ducing the ea 127 128 37 nization 137 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd v 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd v 1/4/11 11:44:39 AM 1/4/11 11:44:39 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 11.
    C o nt e n t s vi Part 4 Communication Through Reports and Business Presentations 140 9 Understanding the Report Process and Research Methods 140 Characteristics of Reports 140 Types of Reports 141 Proposals 143 Basis for Reports: The Problem-Solving Process 143 Recognizing and Defining the Problem 143 Selecting a Method of Solution 145 Collecting and Organizing the Data 149 Arriving at an Answer 155 10 Managing Data and Using Graphics 160 Communicating Quantitative Information 160 Using Graphics 162 Effective and Ethical Use of Graphics 163 Types of Graphic Aids 163 Including Graphics in Texts 170 Positioning Graphics in Texts 170 11 Organizing and Preparing Reports and Proposals 172 Parts of a Formal Report 172 Preliminary Parts of a Report 173 Report Text 176 Report Addenda 177 Organization of Formal Reports 177 Writing Convincing and Effective Reports 178 Choosing a Writing Style for Formal Reports 180 Short Reports 182 Memorandum, Email, and Letter Reports 182 Form Reports 182 Proposals 189 Proposal Structure 189 Proposal Preparation 191 12 Designing and Delivering Business Presentations 194 Planning an Effective Business Presentation 194 Identify Your Purpose 195 Know Your Audience 196 Organizing the Content 197 Introduction 197 Body 199 Closing 200 Designing Compelling Presentation Visuals 200 Types of Presentation Visuals 200 Design of Presentation Visuals 202 Design Tips for Audience Handouts and Notes Pages 203 Refining Your Delivery 204 Delivery Method 204 Vocal Qualities 205 Delivery Style 207 Adapting to Alternate Delivery Situations 210 Culturally Diverse Audiences 210 Team Presentations 212 Distance Presentations 213 Part 5 Communication for Employment 216 13 Preparing Résumés and Application Messages 216 Preparing for the Job Search 216 Gathering Essential Information 217 Identifying Potential Career Opportunities 218 Planning a Targeted Résumé 221 Standard Parts of a Résumé 221 Types of Résumés 226 Preparing Résumés for Print and Electronic Deliveries 227 Preparing a Print (Designed) Résumé 227 Preparing Electronic Résumé Submissions 228 Supplementing a Résumé 234 Professional Portfolios 234 Employment Videos 234 P Su ation for 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd vi 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd vi 1/4/11 11:44:44 AM 1/4/11 11:44:44 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 12.
    Composing Application Messages237 Persuasive Organization 237 General Writing Guidelines 241 Finishing Touches 242 14 Interviewing for a Job and Preparing Employment Messages 244 Understanding Types of Employment Interviews 244 Structured Interviews 244 Unstructured Interviews 246 Stress Interviews 246 Group Interviews 246 Virtual Interviews 246 Preparing for an Interview 247 Research the Company 247 Study Yourself 248 Plan Your Appearance 248 Plan Your Time and Materials 249 Practice 249 Conducting a Successful Interview 249 The Opening Formalities 249 The Information Exchange 250 The Closing 253 Preparing Other Employment Messages 255 Application Forms 255 Follow-Up Messages 255 Thank-You Messages 256 Job-Acceptance Messages 256 Job-Refusal Messages 256 Resignation Messages 258 Recommendation Requests 258 GRAMMAR AND USAGE APPENDIX 260 REFERENCES 275 INDEX 278 ges 237 Empl pl pl ploy oy oy oy oy o me me me ent St Pl Pl Pr C C o n t e n t s 1 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd 1 27776_FM_i-vi_1.indd 1 1/4/11 11:44:50 AM 1/4/11 11:44:50 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 13.
    2 P ar t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s Value of Communication W e communicate to satisfy needs in both our work and private lives. Each of us wants to be heard, appreciated, and wanted. We also want to accomplish tasks and achieve goals. A major value of communication is to help people feel good about themselves and about their organiza- tions. Generally peo- ple communicate for three basic purposes: to inform, to persuade, and to entertain. What is communication? Communication is the pro- cess of exchanging information and meaning between or among individuals through a common system of sym- bols, signs, and behavior. Other words used to describe the communication process include conversing, speaking, corresponding, writing, and listening. Studies indicate that managers typically spend 60 to 80 percent of their time involved in communication. In your career activities, you will communicate in a wide variety of ways, including • attending meetings and writing reports related to strategic plans and company policy. • presenting information to large and small groups in face-to-face and virtual environments. • explaining and clarifying management procedures and work assignments. • coordinating the work of various employees, depart- ments, and other work groups. • evaluating and counseling employees. • promoting the company’s products/services and image. O B J E C T I V E S 1 Define communication and describe the value of communication in business. 2 Explain the communication process model and the ultimate objective of the communication process. 3 Discuss how information flows in an organization. 4 Explain how legal and ethical constraints, diversity challenges, changing technology, and team environment act as strategic forces that influence the process of business communication. BCOM Communication Foundations Part 1 Chapter 1 Establishing a Framework for Business Communication O B J E C T I V E 1 Define communication and describe the value of communication in business. © iStockphoto.com/Alexandr Tovstenko 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 2 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 2 1/3/11 8:00:12 AM 1/3/11 8:00:12 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 14.
    3 C h ap t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n C H A P T E R The Communication Process E ffective business communication is essen- tial to success in today’s work environ- ments. Recent surveys of executives document that abilities in writing and speaking are major determinants of career success in many fields.1 Though essential to personal and professional success, effective business communication does not occur automatically. Your own experiences likely have taught you that a mes- sage is not interpreted correctly just because you transmitted it. An effective communica- tor anticipates pos- sible breakdowns in the communication process—the unlim- ited ways the message can be misunderstood. This mind-set provides the con- centration to design the initial message effectively and to be prepared to intervene at the appropriate time to ensure that the message received is on target. 1 © Roger Wright/Stone/Getty Images O B J E C T I V E 2 Explain the communication process model and the ultimate objective of the communication process. 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 3 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 3 1/3/11 8:00:18 AM 1/3/11 8:00:18 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 15.
    4 P ar t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s Consider the communication process model pre- sented in Figure 1-1. These seemingly simple steps actu- ally represent a very complex process. The Sender Encodes the Message The sender carefully designs a message by selecting (1) words that clearly convey the message and (2) non- verbal signals (gestures, posture, facial expression, and so on) that reinforce the verbal message. The process of selecting and organizing the message is referred to as encoding. The sender’s primary objective is to encode the message in such a way that the message received is the same (or as close as possible) as the message sent. Knowledge of the receiver’s educational level, experi- ence, viewpoints, and other information aids the sender in encoding the message. If information about the receiver is unavailable, the sender can use empathy for the receiver’s position to gain fairly accurate insights to help in encoding the message. The Sender Selects the Channel and Transmits the Message To increase the likeli- hood that the receiver will understand the message, the sender carefully selects an appropriate channel for transmitting the message. Three typical communication channels are two-way, face-to-face; two-way, not face-to-face; and one-way, not face-to-face. Selecting an inappropriate channel can cause the message to be misunderstood and can adversely affect human relations with the receiver. For example, for a complex subject, a sender might begin with a written document and follow up with a face-to-face, phone, or video conference discussion after the receiver has had an opportunity to study the document. Written docu- ments are required when legal matters are involved and written records must be retained. The Receiver Decodes the Message The receiver is the destination of the message. The receiver’s task is to interpret the sender’s message, both verbal and nonverbal, with as little distortion as pos- sible. The process of interpreting the message is referred to as decoding. Because words and nonverbal signals have different meanings to different people, countless problems can occur at this point in the communication process: • The sender inadequately encodes the original mes- sage with words not present in the receiver’s vocabu- lary, ambiguous or nonspecific ideas, or nonverbal signals that distract the receiver or contradict the verbal message. • The receiver is intimidated by the position or author- ity of the sender, resulting in tension that prevents effective concentration on the message and failure to ask for needed clarification. • The receiver prejudges the topic as too boring or dif- ficult to understand and does not attempt to understand the message. • The receiver is close-minded and unreceptive to new and different ideas. With the infinite number of breakdowns possible at each stage of the communication pro- cess, it is indeed a miracle that effective communication ever occurs. The complexity of the communication process ampli- fies the importance of the next stage in the communication process—feedback to clarify misunderstandings. encoding the process of selecting and organizing a message decoding the process of interpreting a message Figure 1-1 The Communication Process Model S E N D E R R E C E I V E R Encodes Message Encodes Message Decodes Message Decodes Message Selects Channel & Transmits Message Selects Channel & Transmits Message I N T E R F E R E N C E S © Cengage Learning 2010 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 4 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 4 1/3/11 8:00:21 AM 1/3/11 8:00:21 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 16.
    5 C h ap t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n The Receiver Encodes the Message to Clarify When the receiver responds to the sender’s message, the response is called feedback. The feedback might prompt the sender to modify or adjust the original message to make it clearer to the receiver. Feedback can be verbal or nonverbal. A remark such as “Could you clarify . . .” or a perplexed facial expression provides clear feedback to the sender that the receiver does not yet understand the mes- sage.Conversely,a confident“Yes,I understand,”and a nod of the head likely signal understanding or encouragement. Interferences Hinder the Process Senders and receivers must learn to deal with the numer- ous factors that hinder the communication process.These factors are referred to as interferences or barriers to effective communication. Previous examples have illus- trated some of the interferences that might occur at vari- ous stages of the communication process. For example, • differences in educational level, experience, cul- ture, and other characteristics of the sender and the receiver increase the complexity of encoding and decoding a message. • physical interferences occurring in the channel include a noisy environment, interruptions, and uncomfortable surroundings. • mental distractions, such as preoccupation with other matters and developing a response, rather than listening. You can surely compile a list of other barriers that affect your ability to communicate with friends,instructors, coworkers,supervisors,andothers.Bybeingawareofthem, you can concentrate on removing these interferences. Communicating within Organizations T o be successful, organizations must cre- ate an environment that energizes and encourages employees to accomplish tasks by promoting genuine open- ness and effective communication. Organizational communication is con- cerned with the move- ment of information within the company structure. Regardless of your career or level within an organiza- tion, your ability to communicate will affect not only the success of the organization but also your personal success and advancement within that organization. Communication Flow in Organizations Communication occurs in a variety of ways within an organization.Somecommunicationflowsareplannedand structured;othersarenot.Somecommunicationflowscan be formally depicted, whereas some defy description. Formal and Informal Channels The flow of communication within an organization fol- lows both formal and informal channels. • Formal communication channel. This channel is typified by the formal organization chart, which is created by management to define individual and group relationships and to specify lines of responsi- bility. Essentially, the formal system is dictated by the technical, political, and economic environment of the organization. Within this system, people are required to behave in certain ways simply to get work done. • Informal communication channel. This channel continuously develops as people interact within the formal system to accommodate their social and psychological needs. Because the informal channel undergoes continual changes, it cannot be depicted accurately by any graphic means. When employees rely almost entirely on the for- mal communication sys- tem as a guide to behavior, the system might be iden- tified as a bureaucracy. Procedures manuals, job descriptions, organiza- tion charts, and other written materials dictate the required behavior. Communication chan- nels are followed strictly, and red tape is abundant. Procedures are generally followed exactly; terms such as rules and policies serve as sufficient rea- sons for actions. Even the most formal organiza- tions, however, cannot function long before an O B J E C T I V E 3 Discuss how information flows in an organization. feedback a receiver’s response to a sender’s message interferences also called barriers; numerous factors that hinder the communication process organizational communication the movement of information within the company structure formal communication channel a channel of communication typified by the formal organization chart; dictated by the technical, political, and economic environment of the organization informal communication channel a channel of communication that continuously develops as people interact within the formal system to accommodate their social and psychological needs © iStockphoto.com/Boris Yankov 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 5 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 5 1/3/11 8:00:23 AM 1/3/11 8:00:23 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 17.
    definite communication channels,the grapevine tends to develop and operate within all organizations. Consider these points related to the accuracy and value of grape- vine communication: • As a communication channel, the grapevine has a reputation for being speedy but inaccurate. In the absence of alarms, the grapevine might be the most effective way to let occupants know that the building is on fire. It certainly beats sending an email. • Although the grapevine often is thought of as a channel for inaccurate communication, in reality it is no more or less accurate than other channels. Even formal commu- nication can become inaccurate and filtered as it passes from level to level in the organizational hierarchy. • The inaccuracy of the grapevine has more to do with the message input than with the output. For example, the grapevine is noted as a carrier of rumors, primarily because it carries informal messages. If the input is a rumor, and nothing more, the output obviously will be inaccurate. But the output might be an accurate description of the original rumor. • In a business office, news about promotions, person- nel changes, company policy changes, and annual salary adjustments often is communicated through the grapevine long before being conveyed through formal channels. The process works similarly in colleges, where information about choice instructors typically is not officially published but is known by students through the grapevine. How best to prepare for examinations, instructor attitudes on attendance and homework, and even faculty personnel changes are messages that travel over the grapevine. • A misconception about the grapevine is that the message passes from person to person until it finally reaches a person who can’t pass it on—the end of the line. Actually, the grapevine works as a network informal communication system emerges. As people operate within the organized system, they interact on a person-to-person basis and create an environment con- ducive to satisfying their personal emotions, prejudices, likes, and dislikes. In the college classroom, for example, the student behavior required to satisfy the formal system is to attend class, take notes, read the text, complete assign- ments, and pass exams. On the first day of class, this behavior is typical of almost all students, particularly if they did not know one another prior to attending the class. As the class progresses, however, the informal sys- tem emerges and overlaps the formal system. Students become acquainted, sit next to people they particu- larly like, talk informally, and might even plan ways to beat the external system by cutting class and borrow- ing notes, for example. Soon, these behaviors become norms for class behavior. Students who do not engage in the informal system might be viewed with disdain by the others. Obviously, the informal system benefits people because it is efficient, and it affects the overall communication of the group in important ways. The Grapevine as an Informal Communication System The grapevine, often called the rumor mill, is perhaps the best-known component of the informal communica- tion system. As people talk casually during breaks, text one another, or chat online, the focus usually shifts from topic to topic. One of the usual topics is work—job, company, supervisor, fellow employees. Even though the formal system includes grapevine the best-known component of the informal communication system 6 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s © John Lund/Blend Images/Jupiterimages 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 6 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 6 1/3/11 8:00:24 AM 1/3/11 8:00:24 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 18.
    7 C h ap t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n channel. Typically, one person tells two or three others, who each tell two or three others, who each tell two or three others, and so on. Thus, the message might spread to a huge number of people in a short time, especially now that the grapevine has gone hi-tech and social networking sites have become “gossip central.” • The grapevine has no single, consistent source. Messages might originate anywhere and follow vari- ous routes. Due at least in part to widespread downsizing and corporate scandals during the last few years, employ- ees in many organizations are demanding to be better informed. Some companies have implemented new for- mal ways, such as newsletters and intranets, as well as informal ways, including blogs and Twitter, for sharing information with their internal constituents. Company openness with employees about management decisions and financial issues means conveying more information through the formal system rather than risking its miscom- munication through informal channels. Zappos—named one of the best companies to work for in America—has become a model for nurturing employees by following core values of humility, fun and weirdness, and open and honest communication. Employees, who describe the cul- ture as “flat-out fun,” are free to be creative and enjoy free lunches and spending time with managers at numer- ous zany team gatherings.2 An informal communication system will emerge from even the most carefully designed formal system. Managers who ignore this fact are attempting to manage blindfolded. Instead of denying or condemning the grape- vine, the effective manager will learn to use the informal communication network.The grapevine, for instance, can be useful in counteracting rumors and false information. Directions for Communication Flow The direction in which communication flows in an organi- zation can be downward, upward, or horizontal, as shown in Figure 1-2. Because these three terms are used frequently in communication discussions, they deserve clarification. Although the concept of flow seems simple, direction has meaning for those participating in the communication process. Figure 1-2 Flow of Information within an Organization UPWARD COMMUNICATION Progress reports (spoken and written) • Results/accomplishments • Problems/clarifications UPWARD COMMUNICATION Ideas/suggestions Feelings/attitudes HORIZONTAL OR LATERAL COMMUNICATION Coordination of interrelated activities Problem-solving efforts DOWNWARD COMMUNICATION Policies and procedures Organizational goals and strategies Work assignments Employee development • Job role/responsibility • Performance appraisal (formal and informal) • Constructive criticism • Deserved praise and recognition Formal Network Flow © Cengage Learning 2010 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 7 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 7 1/3/11 8:00:25 AM 1/3/11 8:00:25 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 19.
    8 Downward Communication Downward Communication. Downwardcommunica- tion flows from supervisor to employee, from policy makers to operating personnel, or from top to bot- tom on the organization chart. A simple policy state- ment from the top of the organization might grow into a formal plan for operation at lower levels. Teaching people how to perform their specific tasks is an element of downward communication. Another ele- ment is orientation to a company’s rules, practices, procedures, history, and goals. Employees learn about the quality of their job performance through down- ward communication. Downward communication nor- mally involves both written and spoken methods and makes use of the following guidelines: • People at high levels in the organization usually have greater knowledge of the organization and its goals than do people at lower levels. • Both spoken and written messages tend to become larger as they move downward through organizational levels. This expansion results from attempts to prevent distortion and is more noticeable in written messages. • Spoken messages are subject to greater changes in meaning than are written messages. When a supervisor sends a message to a subor- dinate employee who then asks a question or nods in agreement, the ques- tion and the nod are signs of feedback. Feedback can flow both downward and upward in organizational communication through traditional as well as infor- mal channels. Upward Communication. Upward communication gen- erally is feedback to downward communication. When management requests information from lower organiza- tional levels, the resulting information becomes feedback to that request. Employees talk to supervisors about them- selves, their fellow employees, their work and methods of doing it, and their perceptions of the organization. These comments are feedback to the downward flow transmit- ted in both spoken and written form by group meetings, procedures or operations manuals,company news releases, the company intranet, and the grapevine. Although necessary and valuable, upward com- munication involves risks. The following factors are important to consider when upward communication flow is involved: • Upward communication is primarily feedback to requests and actions of supervisors. • Upward communication can be misleading because lower- level employees often tell their superiors what they think their superiors want to hear. Therefore, their messages might contradict their true observations and perceptions. • Upward communication frequently involves risk to an employee and is dependent on trust in the supervisor. • Employees will reject superficial attempts by management to obtain feedback. When effectively used, upward communication keeps manage- ment informed about the feelings of lower-level employees, taps the expertise of employees, helps man- agement identify both difficult and potentially promotable employees, and paves the way for even more effective downward com- munication. Upward communication is key to keeping employees engaged and informed and is especially critical in tapping the power of younger employees who expect to collaborate rather than to be supervised.3 Horizontal Communication. Horizontal, or lateral, communication describes interactions between orga- nizational units on the same hierarchical level. These viso bor then nod ques signs and is dependent supervisor. will re y man dback. Wh When en co comm mm me ent nt i of low owe pertise ment i potentially p or r- n ds s- • Employees attempts by obtain feed W o exp agem Upward Communication P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s © iStockphoto.com/Pali Rao n people how to perform their of downward com ment is orienta ti tice ces, s, p p pro roc mpl p oyee es s l ei eir r job b pe ward rd c com Do D w mally invol hods and lines: • People at high organization u ment prac ct t Em the m meth guidel © iStockphoto.com/Pali Rao downward communication a type of communication that flows from supervisor to employee, from policy makers to operating personnel, or from top to bottom on the organization chart upward communication a type of communication that is generally a response to requests from supervisors horizontal (or lateral) communication interactions between organizational units on the same hierarchical level 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 8 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 8 1/3/11 8:00:26 AM 1/3/11 8:00:26 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 20.
    9 C h ap t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n interactions reveal one of the major shortcomings of organizational charts: They do not recognize the role of horizontal communication when they depict authority relationships by placing one box higher than another and define role functions by placing titles in those boxes. Yet management should realize that horizontal communica- tion is the primary means of achieving coordination in a functional organizational structure. Units coordinate their activities to accomplish task goals just as adjacent workers in a production line coordinate their activities. So, for horizontal communication to be maximally effec- tive, the people in any system or organization should be available to one another. Many companies realize that the traditional hier- archy organized around functional units is inadequate for competing in increasingly competitive global mar- kets. They value work teams that integrate work-flow processes rather than specialists in a single function or product. Such work teams break down communica- tion barriers between isolated functional departments, and communication patterns take on varying forms to accommodate team activities. Figure 1-3 Levels of Communication INTRAPERSONAL • Communication within oneself • Not considered by some to be true communication as it does not involve a separate sender and receiver EXAMPLES Individual reminding himself of tasks to complete or daily schedule Supervisor and subordinate, two coworkers Committee, college class Company, organization Media advertisement, website communication INTERPERSONAL • Communication between two people • Goals are to (1) accomplish task confronting them (task goal) and (2) feel better about themselves and each other because of their interaction (maintenance goal) GROUP • Communication among more than two people • Goal of achieving greater output than individual efforts could produce ORGANIZATIONAL • Groups combined in such a way that large tasks may be accomplished • Goal of providing adequate structure for groups to achieve their purposes PUBLIC • The organization reaching out to its public to achieve its goals • Goal of reaching many with the same message © iStockphoto.com/Viorika Prikhodko Levels of Communication Communication can involve sending messages to both large and small audiences. Internal messages are intended for recipients within the organization. External messages are directed to recipients outside the organization. When considering the intended audience, communication can be described as taking place on five levels: intrapersonal, interpersonal, group, organizational, and public. Figure 1-3 depicts the five audi- ence levels. An effective communicator has a clearly defined purpose for each message and selected strategies for targeting his or her intended audience. internal messages messages intended for recipients within the organization external messages messages directed to recipients outside the organization © iStockphoto.com/drfl et 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 9 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 9 1/3/11 8:00:38 AM 1/3/11 8:00:38 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 21.
    Strategic Forces Influencing Business Communication C ommunicationdoes not take place in a vacuum, but rather is influenced by a number of forces at work in the envi- ronment. The effective communicator carefully considers each of these influ- ences and structures communication responsively. Four criti- cal forces influence the communication process and help to determine and define the nature of the communication that occurs, as shown in Figure 1-4. These forces are legal and ethicalconstraints,diver- sity challenges,changing technology, and a team environment. Strategic Force 1: Legal and Ethical Constraints Legal and ethical constraints act as a strategic force on communication because they set boundaries in which communication rightfully occurs. International, federal, state, and local laws affect the way that various busi- ness activities are conducted. For instance, laws specify that certain information must be stated in messages that reply to credit applications and those dealing with the collection of outstanding debts. Furthermore, one’s own ethical standards will often influence what he or she is willing to say in a mes- sage. For example, a system of ethics built on honesty might require that the message provide full disclosure rather than a shrouding of the truth. Legal responsibili- ties, then, are the starting point for appropriate busi- ness communication. One’s ethical belief system, or personal sense of right and wrong behavior, provides further boundaries for professional activity. The press is full of examples of unethical conduct in business and political communities, but unethical behavior is not relegated to the papers—it has far- reaching consequences. Those affected by decisions, the stakeholders, can include people inside and outside the organization. Employees and stockholders are obvious losers when a company fails. Competitors in the same industry also suffer, because their strategies are based on what they perceive about their competition. Beyond that, financial markets as a whole suffer due to erosion of public confidence. Business leaders, government officials, and citizens frequently express concern about the apparent erosion of ethical values in society. Even for those who want to do the right thing, matters of ethics are seldom clear-cut decisions of right versus wrong, and they often contain ambiguous elements. In addition, the pressure appears to be felt most strongly by lower-level managers, often recent business school graduates who are the least expe- rienced at doing their jobs. The Foundation for Legal and Ethical Behavior Although ethics is a common point of discussion, many find defining ethics challenging. Most people immedi- ately associate ethics with standards and rules of con- duct, morals, right and wrong, values, and honesty. Dr. Albert Schweitzer defined ethics as “the name we give to our concern for good behavior. We feel an obligation to consider not only our own personal well-being, but also that of others and of human society as a whole.”4 In P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s 10 O B J E C T I V E 4 Explain how legal and ethical constraints, diversity challenges, changing technology, and team environment act as strategic forces that influence the process of business communication. Figure 1-4 Strategic Factors Influencing Business Communication L E G A L & E T H I C A L CO N S T R A I N TS • International Laws • Domestic Laws • Code of Ethics • Stakeholder Interests • Ethical Frameworks • Personal Values C H A N G I N G T E C H N O LO G Y • Accuracy and Security Issues • Telecommunications • Software Applications • “High-touch” Issues • Telecommuting • Databases D I V E R S I T Y C H A L L E N G E S • Cultural Differences • Language Barriers • Gender Issues • Education Levels • Age Factors • Nonverbal Differences T E A M E N V I R O N M E N T • Trust • Team Roles • Shared Goals and Expectations • Synergy • Group Reward • Distributed Leadership stakeholders people inside and outside the organization who are affected by decisions © Cengage Learning 2010 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 10 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 10 1/3/11 8:00:42 AM 1/3/11 8:00:42 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 22.
    other words, ethicsrefers to the principles of right and wrong that guide you in making decisions that consider the impact of your actions on others as well as yourself. Though the recorded accounts of legal and ethical misconduct would seem to indicate that businesses are dishonest and unscrupulous, keep in mind that mil- lions of business transactions are made daily on the basis of honesty and concern for others. Why should a business make ethical decisions? What difference will it make? James E. Perrella, executive vice president of Ingersoll-Rand Company, gave a powerful reply to these questions:5 Many people, including many business leaders, would argue that such an application of ethics to business would adversely affect bottom-line per- formance. I say nay. . . . Good ethics, simply, is good business. Good ethics will attract investors. Good ethics will attract good employees. You can do what’s right. Not because of conduct codes. Not because of rules or laws. But because you know what’s right. Causes of Illegal and Unethical Behavior Understanding the major causes of illegal and unethical behavior in the workplace will help you become sen- sitive to signals of escalating pressure to compromise your values. Unethical corporate behavior can have a number of causes: • Excessive emphasis on profits. Business managers are often judged and paid on their ability to increase business profits. This emphasis on profits might send a message that the end justifies the means. According to former Federal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan, “infectious greed” ultimately pushed companies such as Enron, Global Crossing, and WorldCom into bankruptcy.6 • Misplaced corporate loyalty. A misplaced sense of corporate loyalty might cause an employee to do what seems to be in the best interest of the company, even if the act is illegal or unethical. • Obsession with personal advancement. Employees who wish to outperform their peers or are working for the next promotion might feel that they cannot afford to fail. They might do whatever it takes to achieve the objectives assigned to them. • Expectation of not getting caught. Thinking that the end justifies the means, employees often believe illegal or unethical activity will never be discov- ered. Unfortunately, a great deal of improper behavior “Mirror, Mirror . . .” Identifying ethical issues in typical workplace situations can be difficult, and coworkers and superiors might apply pressure for seemingly logical reasons. To illustrate, examine each of the following workplace situations for a possible ethical dilemma: • In order to achieve profit expectations of financial analysts, a mortgage lender approves loans to homebuyers without verifying their ability to repay the loans. • To prevent an adverse effect on stock prices, corporate officers deliberately withhold information concerning a planned spinoff. • To protect his job, a product engineer decides not to question a design flaw in a product that could lead to possible injuries and even deaths to consumers because the redesign would cause a delay in product introduction. • To stay within the departmental budget, a supervisor authorizes a software program to be installed on 50 office computers when only one legal copy was purchased. • Angry at a superior for an unfavorable performance appraisal, an employee leaks confidential information (e.g., trade secrets or marketing strategies) to an acquaintance who works for a competitor or posts highly derogative comments about the company on his or her social networking site. Your fundamental morals and values provide the foundation for making ethical decisions. However, as the previous examples imply, even minor concessions in day-to-day decisions can gradually weaken an individual’s ethical foundation. • • Y e c e © Erik Dreyer/Stone/Getty Images 11 C h a p t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n ethics the principles of right and wrong that guide one in making decisions that consider the impact of one’s actions on others as well as on the decision maker 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 11 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 11 1/3/11 8:00:43 AM 1/3/11 8:00:43 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 23.
    12 P ar t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s escapes detection in the business world. Believing no one will ever find out, employees are tempted to lie, steal, and perform other illegal acts. • Unethical tone set by top management. If top managers are not perceived as highly ethical, lower- level managers might be less ethical as a result. Employees have little incentive to act legally and ethically if their superiors do not set an example and encourage and reward such behavior. The saying “the speed of the leader is the speed of the pack” illus- trates the importance of leading by example. • Uncertainty about whether an action is wrong. Many times, company personnel are placed in situa- tions in which the line between right and wrong is not clearly defined. When caught in this gray area, the perplexed employee asks, “How far is too far?” • Unwillingness to take a stand for what is right. Often employees know what is right or wrong but are not willing to take the risk of challenging a wrong action. They might lack the confi- dence or skill needed to con- front others with sensitive legal or ethical issues. They might remain silent and then justify their unwillingness to act. Framework for Analyzing Ethical Dilemmas Determining whether an action is ethical can be difficult. Learning to analyze a dilemma from both legal and ethical perspectives will help you find a solution that conforms to your own personal values. Figure 1-5 shows the four conclusions you might reach when considering the advisability of a particular behavior. Dimension 1: Behavior that is illegal and unethical. When considering some actions, you will reach the conclusion that they are both illegal and unethical. The law specifi- cally outlines the “black” area—those alter- natives that are clearly wrong—and your employer will expect you to become an expert in the laws that affect your particular area. When you encounter an unfamiliar area, you must investigate any possible legal implica- tions. Obviously, obeying the law is in the best interest of all concerned: you as an individual, your company, and society. Contractual agreements between two parties also offer guidance for legal decision making. Frequently, your own individual sense of right and wrong will also confirm that the illegal action is wrong for you personally. In such situations, decisions about appropriate behavior are obvious. Dimension 2: Behavior that is illegal yet ethical. Occasionally, a businessperson will decide that even though a specific action is illegal, there is a justifiable reason to break the law.A case in point is a law passed in Vermont that makes it illegal for a pharmaceutical company to give any gift valued at more than $25 to doctors or their personnel.7 Those supporting the law charge that the giving of freebies drives up medical costs by encouraging doctors to prescribe new, more expensive brand-name drugs. The law’s opponents contend that the gifts do not influ- ence doctors and are merely educational tools for new products. Although a pharmaceuti- cal firm and its employees might see nothing wrong with providing gifts worth in excess of $25, they would be well advised to consider the penalty of $10,000 per violation before acting on their personal ethics. A better course of action would be to act within the law, possibly while lob- bying for a change in the law. Dimension 3: Behavior that is legal yet unethi- cal. If you determine that a behavior is legal and complies with relevant contractual agreements and company policy, your next step is to consult your ng to ing a wrong the confi- con- ve legal might ustify ct. ing action is arning to oth legal will help nforms to Figure 1-5 you might e advisability at is illegal and ng some actions, ion that they are The law specifi- area—those alter- wrong—and your o become an expert our particular area. nfamiliar area, you ible legal implica- of all concerned: you as an in and society. Contractual ag parties also offer guidance fo Frequently, your own indivi wrong will also confirm that t for you personally. In such si appropriate behavior are obvi Dimension 2: Behavior tha Occasionally, a busines even though a specific a justifiable reason to bre is a law passed in Verm for a pharmaceutical valued at more than personnel.7 Those su that the giving of fr costs by encouraging more expensive bran opponents contend t ence doctors and are for new products. A cal firm and its emp wrong with providing $2 $ 5, they would be we penalty of $10,000 per on their personal ethics. would be to act within th bying for a change in the c a co co an next © Stockbyte/Getty Images DIMENSION 1 Behavior that is illegal and unethical DIMENSION 3 Behavior that is legal yet unethical DIMENSION 2 Behavior that is illegal yet ethical DIMENSION 4 Behavior that is both legal and ethical Figure 1-5 Four Dimensions of Business Behavior © Cengage Learning 2010 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 12 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 12 1/3/11 8:00:45 AM 1/3/11 8:00:45 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 24.
    company’s or profession’scode of ethics. This written document summarizes the company’s or profession’s standards of ethical conduct. Some companies refer to this document as a credo. If the behavior does not vio- late the code of ethics, then put it to the test of your own personal integrity. You may at times reject a legal action because it does not “feel right.” Most Americans were appalled to learn that mortgage bankers’ reckless abandonment of traditional lending standards led to the subprime mortgage meltdown. Although they might have acted legally, their profiting at the expense of com- pany employees, stockholders, and the public hardly seemed ethical. You might be faced with situations in which you reject a behavior that is legal because you would not be proud to have your family and commu- nity know that you engaged in it. Dimension 4: Behavior that is both legal and ethical. Decisions in this dimension are easy to make. Such actions comply with the law, company policies, and your professional and personal codes of ethics. The Pagano Model offers a straightforward method for determining whether a proposed action is advis- able.8 For this system to work, you must answer the following six questions honestly: • Is the proposed action legal? (This is the core starting point.) • What are the benefits and costs to the people involved? • Would you want this action to be a universal stan- dard, appropriate for everyone? • Does the action pass the light-of-day test? That is, if your action appeared on television or others learned about it, would you be proud? • Does the action pass the Golden Rule test? That is, would you want the same to happen to you? • Does the action pass the ventilation test? Ask the opinion of a wise friend with no investment in the outcome. Does this friend believe the action is ethical? Martha Stewart was found guilty of conspiracy, obstruction of justice, and making false statements regarding her sale of shares of ImClone stock just before the company’s downturn. Some have defended her action as neither illegal nor immoral, while oth- ers have argued that cracking down on Stewart sent an important message about stock-market manipu- lation. “It’s very important for us to protect integrity of this system,” said David Kelley, the U.S. attorney in Manhattan, after the verdict.“Failure to do so results in a flood of corruption.”9 Strategic Force 2: Diversity Challenges Diversity in the workplace is another strategic force influ- encing communication. Differences between the sender and the receiver in areas such as culture, age, gender, and education require sensitivity on the part of both parties so that the intended message is the one that is received. Understanding how to communicate effectively with people from other cultures has become more inte- gral to the work environment as many U.S. companies are increasingly conducting business with international companies or becoming multinational. Candy manufac- turer Jelly Belly learned a great deal about cultural dif- ferences when the company opened business operations in Thailand. In Thailand, many more employee ameni- ties are required than U.S. employers are accustomed to providing. For example, a Thai employer is expected to provide transportation to and from work as well as free meals and a workout facility for its employees.10 When addressing cultural differences, successful communication must often span barriers of language and differing world views resulting from societal and religious beliefs and practices. When a person fails to consider these factors, communication suffers, and the result is often embarrassing and potentially costly. McDonald’s is an example of a large U.S. company that has expanded its operations to include most major countries in the world. To be successful on an interna- tional scale, managers had to be aware of cultural dif- ferences and be willing to work to ensure that effective communication occurred despite these barriers. Occasionally,however,a whopper of an intercultural communication faux pas occurs. That is what happened when McDonald’s began its promotional campaign in Great Britain for the World Cup soccer championship. It seemed like a clever (and harmless) idea to reproduce the flags of the 24 nations participating in the event and print them on packaging—two million Happy Meal bags, to be exact. What marketing personnel failed to consider was that words from the Koran are printed on the Saudi flag. The idea that sacred words from Islam’s holy book were mass printed to sell a product with the knowledge that the packages would be thrown into the trash angered and offended many Muslims, who imme- diately complained. McDonald’s apologized for the gaffe and agreed to work with Saudis to find a solution to the problem.11 This example shows of how much “homework” is involved in maintaining good relations with custom- ers or clients from other cultures. The potential barrier 13 C h a p t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 13 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 13 1/3/11 8:00:48 AM 1/3/11 8:00:48 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 25.
    14 P ar t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s of language is obvious; however, successful managers know that much more is involved in communicating with everyone—across cultures, genders, ages, abilities, and other differences. Communication Opportunities and Challenges in Diversity As world markets continue to expand, U.S. employees at home and abroad will be doing business with more people from other countries. You might find yourself work- ing abroad for a large American company, an international com- pany with a plant in the United States, or a company with an ethni- cally diverse workforce. Regardless of the workplace, your diversity skills—that is, your ability to communicate effec- tively with both men and women of all ages, cultures, and minority groups— will affect your success in today’s culturally diverse global economy. Workplace diversity can lead to misunderstandings and miscommunications, but it also poses opportunities to improve both workers and organizations. Managers must be prepared to communicate effectively with workers of different nationalities, genders, races, ages, abilities, and so forth. Managing a diverse workforce effectively will require you to communicate with everyone and to help all employees reach their fullest potential and contrib- ute to the company’s goals. To lessen miscommunica- tion, which inevitably occurs, increasing numbers of companies have undertaken diversity initiatives and are providing diversity training seminars to help work- ers understand and appreciate gender and age differ- ences and the cultures of coworkers. Culture and Communication Managers with the desire andtheskilltoconductbusi- ness in new international markets and to manage a diverse workforce effectively will confront problems created by cultural differences. The way messages are decoded and encoded is not just a function of the experiences, beliefs, and assumptions of the person sending or receiving those messages but also is shaped by the society in which he or she lives. People learn patterns of behavior from their culture. The culture of a people is the product of their living expe- riences within their own society. Culture could be described as “the way of life” of a people and includes a vast array of behaviors and beliefs. These patterns affect how people perceive the world, what they value, andhowtheyact.Differing patterns can also create bar- riers to communication. Barriers to Intercultural Communication Because cultures give different definitions of such basics of interaction as values and norms, people raised in two different cultures can clash in various ways. • Ethnocentrism. Problems occur between people of different cultures primarily because people tend to assume that their own cultural norms are the right way to do things. They wrongly believe that the specific patterns of behavior desired in their own cultures are universally valued. This belief, known as enthnocentrism, is certainly natural; but learning about other cultures and developing sensitivity will help minimize ethnocentric reactions when dealing with other cultures. • Stereotypes. We often form a mental picture of the main characteristics of another group, creating preformed ideas of what people in this group are © Feng lei sh/Imaginechina via AP Images “Your ability to communicate effectively with both men and women of all ages, cultures, and minority groups will affect your success in today’s culturally diverse global economy.” diversity skills the ability to communicate effectively with both men and women of all ages, cultures, and minority groups ethnocentrism the assumption that one’s own cultural norms are the right way to do things portunities versity ntinue yees will h - ce. ace, hat is, ate effec- d women of i it but also is shape he or she liv Peop behav The pr r a pa riers Barriers to Communicatio For many U.S. corporations, such as Procter & Gamble, more than 70 percent of total sales in recent years has come from international operations. 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 14 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 14 1/3/11 8:00:48 AM 1/3/11 8:00:48 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 26.
    15 C h ap t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n like. These pictures, called stereotypes, influence the way we interact with members of the other group. When we observe a behavior that conforms to the stereotype, the validity of the preconceived notion is reinforced. We often view the other person as a representative of a class of people rather than as an individual. People of all cultures have stereotypes about other cultural groups they have encountered. These stereotypes can interfere with communication when people interact on the basis of the imagined representative and not the real individual. • Interpretation of time. The study of how a culture perceives time and its use is called chronemics. In the United States, we have a saying that “time is money.” Canadians, like some northern Europeans who are also concerned about punctuality, make appointments, keep them, and complete them, and waste no time in the process. In some other cultures, time is the cheapest commodity and an inexhaustible resource; time represents a person’s span on Earth, which is only part of eternity. To these cultures, engaging in long, casual conversations prior to seri- ous discussions or negotiations is time well spent in establishing and nurturing relationships. On the other hand, the time-efficient American businessper- son is likely to fret about wasting precious time. • Personal space requirements. Space operates as a language just as time does. The study of cultural space requirements is known as proxemics. In all cultures, the distance between people functions in communication as “personal space” or “personal ter- ritory.” In the United States, for example, for intimate conversations with close friends and relatives, indi- viduals are willing to stay within about a foot and a half of each other; for casual conversations, up to two or three feet; for job interviews and personal business, four to twelve feet; and for public occasions, more than twelve feet. However, in many cultures outside the United States, closer personal contact is accepted, or greater distance might be the norm. • Body language. The study of body language is known as kinesics. Body language is not universal, but instead is learned from one’s culture. Even the most basic gestures have varying cultural meanings— the familiar North American symbol for “okay” means zero in France, money in Japan, and an expression of vulgarity in Brazil. Similarly, eye con- tact, posture, and facial expressions carry different meanings throughout the world. • Translation limitations. Words in one language do not always have an equivalent meaning in other languages, and the concepts the words describe are often different as well. Translators can be helpful, but keep in mind that a translator is working with a second language and must listen to one language, mentally cast the words into another language, and then speak them. This process is difficult and opens the possibility that the translator will fall victim to one or more cultural barriers. Even if you cannot speak or write another language fluently, people from other cultures will appreciate sim- ple efforts to learn a few common phrases. Strategic Force 3: Changing Technology Electronic tools have not eliminated the need for basic communication skills; they can, in fact, create new obstacles or barriers to communication that must be Brazil, United States, Other places, not okay okay better check first X ? © Hemera Technologies/AbleStock.com Image/Jupiterimages stereotypes mental pictures that one group forms of the main characteristics of another group, creating preformed ideas of what people in this group are like chronemics the study of how a culture perceives time and its use proxemics the study of cultural space requirements kinesics the study of body language, which is not universal, but instead is learned from one’s culture 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 15 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 15 1/3/11 8:00:52 AM 1/3/11 8:00:52 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 27.
    overcome. These tools,however, also create opportuni- ties, which range from new kinds of communications to improved quality of the messages themselves. Electronic tools, such as the Internet, intranets, document produc- tion software, multimedia presentations, Web publish- ing tools, and email, can help people in various ways, such as by (1) collecting and analyzing data, (2) shap- ing messages to be clearer and more effective, and (3) communicating quickly and efficiently with others in geographically dispersed locations. Using various communication technologies, indi- viduals can often work in their homes or other remote locations and send and receive work from the com- pany office electronically. Telecommuting (also referred to as teleworking) offers various advantages, includ- ing reduced travel time and increased work flexibility. Laptops and smartphones provide computing power and connectivity for professionals wherever they are. While the public Internet is accessible to everyone and offers a wide array of infor- mation, private databases provide specialized and advanced information on specific topics. Databases enable decision makers to obtain information quickly and accurately and offer these advantages: • Data organization—the ability to organize large amounts of data. • Data integrity—assurance that the data will be accurate and complete. • Data security—assurance that the data are secure because access to a database is controlled through several built-in data security features. Internal databases contain proprietary information that is pertinent to the particular business or organiza- tion and its employees. External databases (networks) allow users to access information from remote loca- tions literally around the world and in an instant trans- fer that information to their own computers for further manipulation or storage. Information is available on general news, stocks, financial markets, sports, travel, weather, and a variety of publications. Knowing how to“tunnel”through the vast amounts of irrelevant information available on the Internet to find what you want can be overwhelming. The expe- rience can also be expensive in terms of human time spent and charges incurred for online time. Locating information from electronic sources requires that you telecommuting also called teleworking; working at home or other remote locations and sending and receiving work from the company office electronically Legal and Ethical Implications of Technology In addition to its many benefits, technology poses some challenges for the business communicator. For instance, technology raises issues of ownership, as in the case of difficulties that arise in protecting the copyright of documents transmitted over the Internet. Technology poses dilemmas over access, that is, who has the right to certain stored information pertaining to an individual or a company. Technology threatens our individual privacy, our right to be left alone, free from surveillance or interference from other individuals or organizations. Common invasions of privacy caused by technology include • collecting excessive amounts of information for decision making and maintaining too many files. • monitoring the exact time employees spend on a specific task and between tasks and the exact number and length of breaks, and supervisors’ or coworkers’ reading of another employee’s email and computer files. • integrating computer files containing information collected from more than one agency without permission.12 © iStockphoto.com/Nghe Tran 16 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 16 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 16 1/3/11 8:00:53 AM 1/3/11 8:00:53 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 28.
    17 C h ap t e r 1 : E s t a b l i s h i n g a F r a m e w o r k f o r B u s i n e s s C o m m u n i c a t i o n know the search procedures and methods for construct- ing an effective search strategy. Effective use of various communication tech- nologies helps ensure timely, targeted messages and responses and helps to build interpersonal relation- ships. This responsiveness leads to positive interactions with colleagues and strong customer commitment. Strategic Force 4: Team Environment As firms around the world face problems of decreas- ing productivity, faltering product quality, and worker dissatisfaction, work teams are seen as a way to help firms remain globally competitive. Decentralized deci- sion making enables teams of people to communicate in a peer-to-peer fashion, rather than following traditional lines of authority, and new technologies give employees the ability to communicate easily and openly with one another and with those outside the firm. Although worker involvement in the management process has long been the hallmark of Japanese busi- ness, many businesses in the United States and else- where are empowering self-directed work teams to accomplish various assignments.13 The list of compa- nies using self-directed work teams is diverse, includ- ing Hunt-Wesson, the Internal Revenue Service, the San Diego Zoo, Hewlett-Packard, Southwest Airlines, Toyota, Motorola, General Electric, and Corning. WorkTeam Defined The terms team, work team, group, work group, cross- functional team, and self-directed team are often used interchangeably.14 Whatever the title, a team is a small number of people with complementary skills who work together for a common purpose. Team members set their own goals, in cooperation with management, and plan how to achieve those goals and how their work is to be accomplished. The central organizing element of a team is that it has a common purpose and measurable goals for which the team can be held accountable, inde- pendent of its individual members. Employees in a self- directed work team handle a wide array of functions and work with a minimum of direct supervision.15 A key element in team success is the concept of syn- ergy, defined as a situation in which the whole is greater than the sum of the parts. Teams provide a depth of expertise that is unavailable at the individual level.Teams open lines of communication that then lead to increased interaction among employees and between employees and management. The result is that teams help compa- nies reach their goals of delivering higher-quality prod- ucts and services faster and with more cost effectiveness. Communication Differences inWorkTeams In the past, most businesses were operated in a hierar- chical fashion, with most decisions made at the top and communication following a top-down/bottom-up pat- tern. Communication patterns are different in success- ful team environments as compared with traditional organizational structures: • Trust building is the primary factor that changes the organization’s communication patterns. • Open meetings are an important method for enhanc- ing communication, as they educate employees about the business while building bridges of understanding and trust. • Shared leadership, which involves more direct and effective communication between management and its internal customers, is common. • Listening, problem solving, conflict resolution, negotia- tion, and consensus become important factors in group communication. Some major strengths of teams are as follows:16 9Teams make workers happier by causing them to feel that they are shaping their own jobs. 9Teams increase efficiency by eliminating layers of managers whose job was once to pass orders downward. 9Teams enable a company to draw on the skills and imagination of a whole workforce. © Image Source team a small number of people with complementary skills who work together for a common purpose synergy a situation in which the whole is greater than the sum of the parts 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 17 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 17 1/3/11 8:00:53 AM 1/3/11 8:00:53 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 29.
    • Information flowsvertically up to management and down to workers, as well as horizontally among team members, other teams, and supervisors. Communication is perhaps the single most impor- tant aspect of successful teamwork. Open lines of com- munication increase interaction between employees and management. All affected parties should be kept informed as projects progress. Maximization ofWorkTeam Effectiveness Grouping employees into a team structure does not mean that they will automatically function as a team. A group must go through a developmental process to begin to function as a team. Members need training in such areas as problem solving, goal setting, and conflict resolution. Teams must be encouraged to establish the “three Rs”—roles, rules, and relationships.17 The self-directed work team can become the basic organizational building block to best ensure success in dynamic global competition. Skills for successful partici- pationinteamenvironmentsaresomewhatdifferentfrom those necessary for success in old-style organizations: • Ability to give and take constructive criticism, listen actively, clearly impart one’s views to others, and provide meaningful feedback. • Skills in breaking down emotional barriers, such as insecurity or condescension. • Ability to promote team functioning by remov- ing process barriers, such as rigid policies and procedures. • Understanding of the feelings and needs of cowork- ers so members feel comfortable stating their opin- ions and discussing the strengths and weaknesses of the team. • Skills in overcoming cultural barriers, such as ste- reotyped roles and responsibilities, that can separate workers from management.18 • Application of leadership skills that apply to a dynamic group setting and lead to team success. In dynamic team leadership, referred to as distributed leadership, the role of leader can alternate among members, and more than one leadership style can be active at any given time.19 Gender, cultural, and age differences among mem- bers of a team can present barriers to team commu- nication. Knowing what behaviors can limit the group process is imperative to maximizing results. Team mem- bers might need awareness training to assist in recogniz- ing behaviors that may hinder team performance and in overcoming barriers that can limit the effectiveness of their communication. © Rachel Epstein/PhotoEdit To improve group communication, time needs to be set aside to assess the quality of interaction. Questions to pose about the group process might include the following: What roles are members playing? For instance, is one person dominating while others contribute little or nothing? Is the group dealing with conflict in a positive way? What are our common goals? What in the group process is going well? What about the group process could be improved? 18 P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 18 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 18 1/3/11 8:00:55 AM 1/3/11 8:00:55 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 30.
    REVIEW BCOM3 puts amultitude of study aids at your fingertips. After reading the chapters, check out these resources for further help: • Chapter in Review cards, Model Document Cards, and Style Cards can be found at the back of the book. These detach- able, convenient cards provide you with a portable study tool with all of the pertinent informa- tion for class preparation: ° learning outcome summaries ° key term definitions ° communication checklists ° grammar quizzes ° visual summaries ° additional model documents ° page layout, letter and punctua- tion style guidelines • Interactive and printable flash cards online give you several additional ways to check your comprehension of key concepts. • Other great ways to help you study include the Interactive eBook, Chapter Quizzes, Assignments & Handouts, E-Lectures, Cases, Games (Crossword Puzzles & Quiz Bowl), Glossary, Learning Objectives, PowerPoint® , Videos, Grammar Games, Templates, and Language Review Quizzes. You can find it all at CourseMate. Login at www.cengagebrain.com HE DID 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 19 27776_ch01_002-019.indd 19 1/3/11 8:01:07 AM 1/3/11 8:01:07 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 31.
    20 P ar t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s Behavioral Theories that Impact Communication I nterpersonal intelligence pertains to the abil- ity to read, empathize, and understand oth- ers.1 People with interpersonal intelligence are good with people and thrive in social interac- tion. Rather than being a quality that some are born with and others are not, interper- sonal intelligence can be improved by broad- ening your under- standing of human behavior and moti- vation and practic- ing certain behaviors when in interpersonal situations. Knowledge from the fields of soci- ology and psychology is helpful to understanding human needs and providing you with valuable insights about how to achieve effec- tive communication in the workplace. Recognizing Human Needs Psychologist Abraham Maslow developed the concept of a hierarchy of needs through which people progress. In our society, most people have reasonably satisfied their two lower-level needs: (1) physiological needs (food and basic provision) and (2) their security and safety needs (shelter and protec- tion from the elements and physical danger). Beyond O B J E C T I V E S 1 Explain how behavioral theories about human needs, trust and disclosure, and motivation relate to business communication. 2 Describe the role of nonverbal messages in communication. 3 Identify aspects of effective listening. 4 Identify factors affecting group and team communication. 5 Discuss aspects of effective meeting management. BCOM Communication Foundations Part 1 Chapter 2 Focusing on Interpersonal and Group Communication O B J E C T I V E 1 Explain how behavioral theories about human needs, trust and disclosure, and motivation relate to business communication. © iStockphoto.com/Alexandr Tovstenko interpersonal intelligence the ability to read, empathize, and understand others 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 20 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 20 1/3/11 8:21:01 AM 1/3/11 8:21:01 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 32.
    21 C h ap t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n C H A P T E R these two basic need levels, people progress to satisfy the three upper-level needs: (3) social needs for love, acceptance, and belonging; (4) ego or esteem needs to be heard, appreciated, and wanted; and (5) self-actualizing needs, including the need to achieve one’s fullest poten- tial through professional, philanthropic, political, educa- tional, and artistic channels. As people satisfy needs at one level, they move on to the next. The levels that have been satisfied still are present, but their importance diminishes. Effective com- municators are able to identify and appeal to need levels in various individuals or groups.Advertising is designed to appeal to need levels. Luxury car and dream vacation ads appeal to ego needs, teeth whitening and anti-aging product messages appeal to social needs, and identity theft, health and fitness, and environmentally friendly commercials appeal to security and safety needs. Efforts to help employees satisfy their needs are essential, since a satisfied worker is generally more productive than a dissatisfied one. In communication activities, a sender’s message is more likely to appeal to the receiver if the receiver’s need is accurately identified. 2 © Milena Boniek/PhotoAlto/Photolibrary 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 21 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 21 1/3/11 8:21:06 AM 1/3/11 8:21:06 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 33.
    22 P ar t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s Stroking People engage in communication with oth- ers in the hope that the outcome might lead to mutual trust, mutual pleasure, and psy- chological well-being. The communication exchange is a means of sharing information about things, ideas, tasks, and selves. Each communication interaction, whether casual or formal,provides an emotional stroke that can have either a positive or a negative effect on your feelings about yourself and others. Getting a pat on the back from the supervisor, receiving a congratulatory phone call or text message, and being listened to by another person are examples of everyday pos- itive strokes. Negative strokes might include receiving a hurtful comment, being avoided or left out of conversation, and receiving a rep- rimand from a superior. By paying attention to the importance of strokes, managers can greatly improve communication and people’s feelings about their work. Exploring the Johari Window As relationships develop, the people involved continue to learn about each other and them- selves, as shown by the Johari Window in Figure 2-1. Area I, the free or open area, rep- resents what we know about ourselves and what others know about us. Area II, the blind area, designates those things others know about us but that we don’t know about ourselves; for example, you are the only person who can’t see your physical self as it really is. Things we know about ourselves but that others don’t know about us occupy the hidden or secret area III. Area IV includes the unknown: things we don’t know about ourselves and others don’t know about us, such as our ability to handle emergency situations if we’ve never been faced with them. Each of the window areas can vary in size accord- ing to the degree to which we learn about ourselves and are willing to disclose things about ourselves to others. Reciprocal sharing occurs when people develop trust in each other. When a con- fidant demonstrates that he or she can be trusted, trust is reinforced and leads to an expansion of the open area of the Johari Window. Usually we are willing to tell people about various things that aren’t truly personal. But we share personal thoughts, ambitions, and inner feelings only with selected others—those whom we have learned to trust. The relationships existing between supervisor and employee, doctor and patient, and law- yer and client are those of trust, but only in specific areas. In more intimate relationships with significant others, siblings, and parents, deeper, personal feelings are entrusted to each other. The idea that trust and openness lead to better com- munication between two people also applies to groups. Managers engaged in organizational development (OD) are concerned with developing successful organizations by building effective small groups. They believe small group effectiveness evolves mostly from a high level of mutual trust among group members. The aim of OD is to open emotional as well as task-oriented communi- cation. To accomplish this aim, groups often become involved in encounter sessions designed to enlarge the open areas of the Johari Window.2 Figure 2-1 The Johari Window KNOWN TO OTHERS NOT KNOWN TO OTHERS KNOWN TO SELF NOT KNOWN TO SELF I Free or Open Area II Blind Area III Hidden Area IV Unknown Area stroke emotional response one gets in a communication interaction that has either a positive or negative effect on feelings about oneself and others © iStockphoto.com/Stephen Strathdee 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 22 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 22 1/3/11 8:21:09 AM 1/3/11 8:21:09 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 34.
    23 C h ap t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n Contrasting Management Styles Douglas McGregor, a management theorist, attempted to distinguish between the older, traditional view that workers are concerned only about satisfying lower- level needs and the more contemporary view that productivity can be enhanced by assisting workers in satisfying higher-level needs. Under the older view, management exercised strong control, emphasized the job to the exclusion of concern for the individual, and sought to motivate solely through external incen- tives—a job and a paycheck. McGregor labeled this management style Theory X. Under the contemporary style, Theory Y, management strives to balance con- trol and individual freedom. By treating the individual as a mature person, management lessens the need for external motivation; treated as adults, people will act as adults. The situational leadership model developed by Paul Hersey and Kenneth Blanchard does not pre- scribe a single leadership style, but advocates that what is appropriate in each case depends on the follower (subordinate) and the task to be performed. Directive behavior is characterized by the leader’s giving detailed rules and instructions and monitoring closely that they are followed. The leader decides what is to be done and how. In contrast, supportive behavior is characterized by the leader’s listening, communicating, recognizing, and encouraging. Different degrees of directive and sup- portive behavior can be desirable, given the situation.3 Combining the ideas of Maslow and McGregor with those of Hersey and Blanchard leads to the conclusion that “the right job for the person” is a better philosophy than “the right person for the job.” The Total Quality Management movement focuses on creating a more responsible role for the worker in an organization. In a Total Quality Management envi- ronment, decision-making power is distributed to the people closest to the problem, who usually have the best information sources and solutions. Each employee, from the president to the custodian, is expected to solve problems, participate in team-building efforts, and expand the scope of his or her role in the organiza- tion. The goal of employee empowerment is to build a work environment in which all employees take pride in their work accomplishments and begin motivating themselves from within rather than through traditional extrinsic incentives.4 Managers of many companies understand that empowering employees to initiate continuous improvements is critical for survival. Only companies producing quality products and services will survive in today’s world market. Nonverbal Communication M anagers use verbal and nonverbal messages to communicate ideas to employees. Verbal means “through the use of words,” either written or spoken. Nonverbal means“without the use of words.” Although major attention in communi- cation study is given to verbal messages, stud- ies show that nonverbal elements can account for more than 90 per- cent of the total mean- ing of a message.5 Nonverbal communication includes metacommunication and kinesic messages. Metacommunication A metacommunication is a message that, although not expressed in words, accompanies a message that is expressed in words. For example, “Don’t be late for work” communicates caution; yet the sentence might imply (but not express in words) such additional ideas as “You are frequently late, and I’m warning you,” or “I doubt your dependability.” “Your solution is per- fect” might also convey a metacommunication such as “You are efficient,” or “I certainly like your work.” Whether you are speak- ing or writing, you can be confident that those who receive your mes- sages will be sensitive to the messages expressed in words and to the accompanying messages that are present but not expressed in words. Kinesic Messages People constantly send meaning through kinesic communication, an idea expressed through non- verbal behavior. In other words, receivers gain directive behavior characterized by leaders who give detailed rules and instructions and monitor closely that they are followed supportive behavior characterized by leaders who listen, communicate, recognize, and encourage their followers Total Quality Management focuses on creating a more responsible role for the worker in an organization by distributing decision–making power to the people closest to the problem, empowering employees to initiate continuous improvements metacommunication a nonverbal message that, although not expressed in words, accompanies a message that is expressed in words O B J E C T I V E 2 Describe the role of nonverbal messages in communication. 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 23 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 23 1/3/11 8:21:11 AM 1/3/11 8:21:11 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 35.
    24 P ar t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s additional meaning from what they see and hear—the visual and the vocal: • Visual kinesic communication—gestures, winks, smiles, frowns, sighs, attire, grooming, and all kinds of body movements. • Vocal kinesic communication—intonation, projec- tion, and resonance of the voice. Following are some examples of kinesic messages and the meanings they can convey. Action Possible Kinesic Message A wink or light chuckle follows a statement. “Don’t believe what I just said.” A manager is habitually late for staff meetings and with email replies. “My time is more important than yours. You can wait for me.” Alternately, the action might be ordinary for a non-U.S.-born manager. A group leader sits at a position other than at the head of the table. “I want to demonstrate my equality with other members.” An employee wears clothing that reveals tattoos, which violates the company’s dress code. “Rules are for other people; I can do what I want.” Alternately, “I do not understand the expectations.” A job applicant submits a résumé containing numerous errors. “My language skills are deficient.” Alternately, “I didn’t care to do my best.” Understanding Nonverbal Messages Metacommunications and kinesic messages have char- acteristics that all communicators should take into account. • Nonverbal messages cannot be avoided. Both written and spoken words convey ideas in addition to the ideas contained in the words used. All actions— and even the lack of action—have meaning to those who observe them. • Nonverbal messages can have different meanings for different people. If a team member smiles after making a statement, one member might conclude that the speaker was try- ing to be funny; another might conclude that the speaker was pleased about having made such a great contribution; another might see the smile as indicat- ing friendliness. • Nonverbal messages vary between and within cultures. Not only do nonverbal messages have different meanings from culture to culture, but men and women from the same culture typically exhibit different body language. As a rule, U.S. men make less body contact with other men than do women with women. Acceptable male body language might include a handshake or a pat on the back, while women are afforded more flexibility in making body contact with each other. • Nonverbal messages can be intentional or unintentional. “You are right about that” can be intended to mean “I agree with you” or “You are right on this issue, but you have been wrong on all others discussed.” • Nonverbal messages can contradict the accom- panying verbal message, and affect whether your message is understood or believed. The adage “actions speak louder than words” reveals much about how people perceive messages. Picture a person who says, “I’m happy to be here,” but looks at the floor, talks in a weak and halting voice, and clasps his hands timidly in front of his body. Because his verbal and nonverbal messages are contradictory, his audience might not trust his words. Similarly, consider the negative effect of a sloppy personal appearance by a job candidate. • Nonverbal messages can receive more attention than verbal messages. If a supervisor repeatedly glances at his cell phone for text messages or rhythmically taps a pen while making a statement, the words might not register in the employee’s mind. An error in basic grammar might receive more attention than the idea that is being transmitted. • Nonverbal messages provide clues about the sender’s background and motives. For example, excessive use of big words might suggest that a person reads widely or has an above-average education; it might also suggest a need for social recognition or insecurity about his or her social background. • Nonverbal messages are influenced by the circumstances surrounding the communication. Assume that two men, Ganesh and Jacob, are friends at work. When they are together on the job, Ganesh sometimes puts his hand on Jacob’s shoulder. To Jacob, the act could mean noth- ust his ffect b e taps a s might error in ntion b, ob’s noth- © Richard Ransier/Corbis visual kinesic communication gestures, winks, smiles, frowns, sighs, attire, grooming, and all kinds of body movements vocal kinesic communication intonation, projection, and resonance of the voice 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 24 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 24 1/3/11 8:21:12 AM 1/3/11 8:21:12 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 36.
    25 C h ap t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n ing more than “We are close friends.” But suppose Ganesh is a member of a committee that subse- quently denies a promotion for Jacob. Afterward, the same act could mean “We are still friends,” but it could also cause resentment. Because of the circum- stances, the same act could now mean something such as “Watch the hand that pats; it can also stab.” • Nonverbal messages can be beneficial or harm- ful. Words or actions can be accompanied by nonver- bal messages that help or hurt the sender’s purpose. Metacommunications and kinesic communications can convey something such as “I am efficient in my business and considerate of others,” or they can con- vey the opposite. They cannot be eliminated, but you can make them work for you instead of against you. Listening as a Communication Skill D espite the fact that many professionals believe incorrectly that business com- munication is about presentation and not interaction, most managers spend a major part of their day listening and speaking with others. Listening to supervisors, employees, customers, and col- leagues commonly con- sumes more of business employees’ time than reading, writing, and speaking combined. Listening is an interpersonal skill as critical as the skill of speaking. CEO Brad Anderson of Best Buy explains that effective listening is central to the work culture of his young retail employees who have grown up in a digital age and expect a two-way conver- sation in a peer-to-peer fashion rather than a one-way lecture. Anderson emphasizes that being perceived as a poor listener would “shut him down as a CEO.”6 Effective listening habits pay off in several ways: ; Good listeners are liked by others because they sat- isfy the basic human needs of being heard and being wanted. ; People who listen well are able to separate fact from fiction, cope effectively with false persuasion, and avoid having others use them for personal gain. ; Effective listening leads to sensitivity and tolerance toward key individuals who are critical to the orga- nization’s success, such as employees, customers, and suppliers. ; Effective listeners are engaged and constantly learning—gaining knowledge and skills that lead to increased creativity, job performance, advancement, and satisfaction. ; Job satisfaction increases when people know what is going on, when they are heard, and when they participate in the mutual trust that develops from good communication. Listening depends on your abilities to receive and decode both verbal and nonverbal messages. The best- devised messages and sophisticated communication systems will not work unless people on the receiving end of spoken messages actually listen. Senders of spo- ken messages must assume their receivers can and will listen, just as senders of written messages must assume their receivers can and will read. Listening for a Specific Purpose Individuals satisfy a variety of purposes through listen- ing: (1) interacting socially, (2) receiving information, (3) solving problems, and (4) sharing feelings with oth- ers. Each activity may call for a different style of listen- ing or for a combination of styles. • Casual listening. Listening for pleasure, recreation, amusement, and relaxation is casual listening. Some people listen to music all day long to relax the brain and mask unwanted sounds during daily routines, work periods, and daily commutes. Aspects of casual listening are as follows: { It provides relaxing breaks from more serious tasks and supports our emotional health. { It illustrates that people are selective listeners. You listen to what you want to hear. In a crowded room in which everyone seems to be talking, you can block out all the noise and engage in the con- versation you are having with someone. { It doesn’t require much emotional or physical effort. • Listening for information. Listening for informa- tion involves the search for data or material. In a lecture class, for example, the instructor usually has a strategy for guiding the class to desired goals. The instructor will probably stress several major points and use supporting evidence to prove or to reinforce them. When engaged in this type of listening, you could become so focused on recording every detail that you take copious notes with no organi- zation. When listen- ing for information: sp a o th gr sa le p O B J E C T I V E 3 Identify aspects of effective listening. casual listening listening for pleasure, recreation, amusement, and relaxation listening for information listening that involves the search for data or material 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 25 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 25 1/3/11 8:21:16 AM 1/3/11 8:21:16 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 37.
    26 P ar t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s { Use an outlining process to help you capture main ideas and supporting subpoints in a logical way. { Watch the speaker as you listen to him or her, since most speakers exhibit a set of mannerisms composed of gestures and vocal inflections to indi- cate the degree of importance or seriousness that they attach to portions of their presentations. • Intensive listening. When you listen to obtain infor- mation, solve problems, or persuade or dissuade (as in arguments), you are engaged in intensive listen- ing. Intensive listening involves greater use of your analytical ability to proceed through problem-solving steps. When listening intensively: { Become a good summarizer. { Trace the development of the discussion and then move from there to your own analysis. • Empathetic listening. Empathy occurs when a person attempts to share another’s feelings or emo- tions. Counselors attempt to use empathetic listen- ing in dealing with their clients, and good friends listen empathetically to each other. Empathy is a valuable trait developed by people skilled in inter- personal relations. When you take the time to listen to another, the courtesy is usually returned. When listening empathetically: { Avoid preoccupation with your own problems. Talking too much and giving strong nonverbal signals of disinterest destroy others’ desire to talk. { Remember that total empathy can never be achieved simply because no two people are exactly alike. The more similar our experiences, however, the better the opportunity to put ourselves in the other person’s shoes. Listening with empathy involves some genu- ine tact along with other good listening habits. You might have to combine listening intensively and listening for feelings in some situations. Performance appraisal interviews, disciplinary conferences, and other sensitive discussions between supervisors and employees require listening intensively for accurate understanding of the message and listening empathetically for feelings, preconceived points of view, and background. Bad Listening Habits Most of us have developed bad listening habits in one or more of the following areas: • Faking attention. Have you ever been introduced to someone only to realize 30 seconds later that you missed the name? We can look directly at a person, nod, smile, and pretend to be listening. • Allowing disruptions. We welcome disruptions of almost any sort when we are engaged in somewhat difficult listening. The next time someone enters your classroom or meeting room, notice how almost everyone in the room turns away from the speaker and the topic to observe the latecomer. • Overlistening. When we attempt to record many details in writing or in memory we can overlisten and miss the speaker’s major points. • Stereotyping. We make spontaneous judgments about others based on their appearances, manner- isms, dress, speech delivery, etc. If a speaker doesn’t meet our standards in these areas, we simply turn off our listening and assume the speaker can’t have much to say. • Dismissing subjects as uninteresting. People tend to use disinterest as a rationale for not listening. Unfortunately, the decision is usually made before the topic is ever introduced. A good way to lose an instruc- tor’s respect when you have to miss class is to ask,“Are we going to do anything important in class today?” • Failing to observe nonverbal aids. To listen effec- tively, you must observe the speaker. Facial expres- sions and body motions always accompany speech and contribute much to messages. Many bad listening habits develop simply because the speed of spoken messages is far slower than our abil- ity to receive and process them. Normal speaking speeds intensive listening listening to obtain information, solve problems, or persuade or dissuade empathetic listening listening to others in an attempt to share their feelings or emotions © Image Source Overlistening Faking attention Allowing disruptions 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 26 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 26 1/3/11 8:21:17 AM 1/3/11 8:21:17 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 38.
    27 are between 100and 150 words a minute. The human ear can actually distinguish words in speech in excess of 500 words a minute, and many people read at speeds well beyond 500 words a minute. Finally, our minds process thoughts at thousands of words a minute. Because individuals can’t speak fast enough to challenge our ability to listen, listeners have a respon- sibility to make spoken communication effective. Good listening typically requires considerable mental and emotional effort. Group Communication A lthough much of your spoken commu- nication in business will occur in one- to-one relationships, another frequent spoken communication activity will likely occur when you participate in groups, committees, and teams. Increasing Focus on Groups Developments among U.S. businesses in recent years have shifted attention away from the employment of traditional organizational subunits as the only mecha- nisms for achieving organizational goals and toward the increased use of groups. • Flat organizational structures. Many businesses today are downsizing and eliminating layers of management. Companies implementing Total Quality Management programs are reorganizing to dis- tribute the decision-making power throughout the organization. The trend is to eliminate functional or departmental boundaries. Instead, work is reorga- nized in cross-disciplinary teams that perform broad core processes (e.g., product development and sales generation) and not narrow tasks (e.g., forecasting market demand for a particular product). In a flat organizational structure, communicating across the organization chart (among the cross- disciplinary teams) becomes more important than communicating up and down in a top-heavy hierar- chy. An individual can take on an expanded role as important tasks are assumed. This role can involve power and authority that surpasses the individual’s status, or formal position in the organizational chart. Much of the communication involves face-to- face meetings with team members rather than numer- ous, time-consuming “handoffs” as the product moves methodically from one department to another. The time needed to design a new card at Hallmark Cards decreased significantly when the company adopted a flat organizational structure. Team members representing the former functional areas (graphic artists, writers, marketers, and oth- ers) now work in a central area, communicating openly and frequently, solving problems and making decisions about the entire process as a card is being developed. For example, a writer struggling with a verse for a new card can solicit immediate input from the graphic artist working on the team rather than finalizing the verse and then “handing it off” to the art department.7 • Heightened Focus on Cooperation. Competition has been a characteristic way of life in U.S. com- panies. Organizations and individuals compete for a greater share of scarce resources, for a limited number of positions at the top of organizations, and for esteem in their profes- sions. Such competi- tion is a healthy sign of the human desire to succeed, and, in O B J E C T I V E 4 Identify factors affecting group and team communication. role tasks employees assume that can involve power and authority that surpasses their formal position on the organization chart status one’s formal position in the organizational chart Failing to use nonverbal aids Dismissing subject as uninteresting C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 27 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 27 1/3/11 8:21:19 AM 1/3/11 8:21:19 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 39.
    28 P ar t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s Suggestions for Effective Listening You can enhance the effectiveness of your face-to-face listening by following these suggestions: • Minimize environmental and mental distractions. Take time to listen. Move to a quiet area where you are not distracted by noise or other conversation. Avoid becoming so preoccupied with what you will say next that you fail to listen. • Get in touch with the speaker. Maintain an open mind while attempting to understand the speaker’s background, prejudices, and points of view. Listen for emotionally charged words and watch for body language, gestures, facial expressions, and eye movements as clues to the speaker’s underlying feelings. • Use your knowledge of speakers to your advantage. Some people seem to run on and on with details before making the point. With this speaker, you must anticipate the major point but not pay much attention to details. Other speakers give conclusions first and perhaps omit support for them. In this case, you must ask questions to obtain further information. • Let the speaker know you are actively involved. Show genuine interest by remaining physically and mentally involved; for example, avoid daydreaming, yawning, frequently breaking eye contact, looking at your cell phone or papers on your desk, whispering, etc. • Do not interrupt the speaker. Try to understand the speaker’s full meaning, and wait patiently for an indication that you should enter the conversation. • Ask reflective questions that assess understanding. Simply restate in your own words what you think the other person has said. This paraphrasing will reinforce what you have heard and allow the speaker to correct any misunderstanding or add clarification. • Use probing prompts to direct the speaker. Use probing statements or questions to help the speaker define the issue more concretely and specifically. • Use lag time wisely. Listening carefully should be your primary focus; however, you can think ahead at times as well. Making written or mental notes allows you to provide useful feedback when the opportunity arises. If you cannot take notes during the conversation, record important points as soon as possible so you can summarize the speaker’s key points. © Nicole Hill/Rubberball/Jupiterimages 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 28 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 28 1/3/11 8:21:20 AM 1/3/11 8:21:20 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 40.
    terms of economicbehavior, competition is funda- mental to the private enterprise system. At the same time, when excessive competition replaces the coop- eration necessary for success, communication can be diminished, if not eliminated. Just as you want to look good in the eyes of your coworkers and supervisors, units within organiza- tions want to look good to one another. This attitude can cause behavior to take the competitive form, a “win/lose” philosophy. When excessive competition has a negative influence on the performance of the organization, everyone loses. Although competition is appropriate and desir- able in many situations, many companies have taken steps through open communication and infor- mation and reward systems to reduce competition and to increase cooperation. Cooperation is more likely when the competitors (individuals or groups within an organization) have an understanding of and appreciation for others’ importance and func- tions. This cooperative spirit is characterized as a “win/win” philosophy. One person’s success is not achieved at the expense or exclusion of another. Groups identify a solution that everyone finds sat- isfactory and is committed to achieving. Reaching this mutual understanding requires a high degree of trust and effective interpersonal skills, particularly empathetic and intensive listening skills, and the willingness to communicate long enough to agree on an action plan acceptable to everyone. Characteristics of Effective Groups Groupsformforsynergisticeffects;thatis,throughpooling their efforts, group members can achieve more collectively than they could individually. At the same time, the social nature of groups contributes to the individual goals of members. Communication in small groups leads to group decisions that are generally superior to individual deci- sions. The group process can motivate members, improve thinking, and assist attitude development and change.The emphasis that a particular group places on task and main- tenance activities is based on several factors. As you consider the following factors of group communication, try to visualize their relationship to the groups to which you have belonged, such as in school, religious organizations, athletics, and social activities. • Common goals. In effective groups, participants share a common goal, interest, or benefit. This focus on goals allows members to overcome individual differences of opinion and to negotiate acceptable solutions. • Role perception. People who are invited to join groups have perceptions of how the group should operate and what it should achieve. In addition, each member has a self-concept that dictates how he or she will behave. Those known to be aggressive will attempt to be confrontational and forceful; those who like to be known as moderates will behave in moderate ways by settling arguments rather than initiating them. In successful groups, members play a variety of necessary roles and seek to eliminate nonproductive ones. • Longevity. Groups formed for short-term tasks, such as arranging a dinner and program, will spend more time on the task than on mainte- nance. However, groups formed for long-term assignments, such as an audit of a major corporation by a team from a public accounting firm, may devote much effort to Three Teams with Common Goals Motorola’s new organizational structure divides information technology (IT) staff into three basic teams: “Plan,” composed of business analysts who interface with the rest of the business; “Build,” the application developers; and “Run,” the maintenance staff. An unexpected consequence of connecting the IT staff so tightly to business partners has been a significant increase in project activity.8 © David Paul Morris/Bloomberg via Getty Images s and seek to eliminate nonproductive ones. ngevity. Groups formed for short-term ks, such as arranging a dinner and gram, will spend more time the task than on mainte- ce. However, groups formed long-term assignments, h as an audit of a major poration by a team from ublic accounting m, may devote ch effort to 29 C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n © iStockphoto.com/Lise Gagne 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 29 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 29 1/3/11 8:21:21 AM 1/3/11 8:21:21 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 41.
    30 P ar t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s maintenance goals. Maintenance includes division of duties, scheduling, record keeping, reporting, and assessing progress. • Size. The smaller the group, the more its members have the opportunity to communicate with each other. Conversely, large groups often inhibit com- munication because the opportunity to speak and interact is limited. When broad input is desired, large groups can be good. When extensive interaction is the goal, smaller groups might be more effective. Interestingly, large groups generally divide into smaller groups for maintenance purposes, even when the large group is task oriented. • Status. Some group members will appear to be better qualified than others. Consider a group in which the chief executive of the organization is a member. When the chief executive speaks, members agree. When members speak, they tend to direct their remarks to the one with high status—the chief executive. People are inclined to communicate with peers as their equals, but they tend to speak upward to their supervisor and downward to lower-level employees. In general, groups require balance in status and expertise. • Group norms. A norm is a standard or average behavior. All groups possess norms. An instruc- tor’s behavior helps establish classroom norms. If an instructor is generally late for class, students will begin to arrive late. If the instructor permits talking during lectures, the norm will be for students to talk. People conform to norms because con- formity is easy and nonconformity is difficult and uncomfortable. Conformity leads to acceptance by other group members and creates communication opportunities. • Leadership. The performance of groups depends on several factors, but none is more important than leadership. Some hold the mistaken view that leaders are not necessary when an organization moves to a group concept. The role of leaders changes substan- tially, but they still have an important part to play. The ability of a group leader to work toward task goals while contributing to the development of group and individual goals is often critical to group success. Leadership activities may be shared among several participants, and leadership may also be rotated, for- mally or informally. The leader can establish norms, determine who can speak and when, encourage everyone to contribute, and provide the motivation for effective group activity.9 Group Roles Groups are made up of members who play a variety of roles, both positive and negative. Negative roles detract from the group’s purposes and include the following: Perhaps your group experiences have been positive as a result of members’ playing positive group roles that promote the group’s purposes: © iStockphoto.com/vm Although much research has been conducted in the area of group size, no optimal number of members has been identified. Groups of five to seven members are thought to be best for decision-making and problem-solving tasks. An odd number of members is often preferred because decisions are possible without tie votes. • Isolate—one who is physically present but fails to participate • Dominator—one who speaks too often and too long • Free rider—one who does not do his or her fair share of the work • Detractor—one who constantly criticizes and complains • Digresser—one who deviates from the group’s purpose • Airhead—one who is never prepared • Socializer—one who pursues only the social aspect of the group © Radius Images/Jupiterimages norm a standard or average behavior 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 30 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 30 1/3/11 8:21:24 AM 1/3/11 8:21:24 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 42.
    31 C h ap t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n In healthy groups, members may fulfill multiple roles, which rotate as the need arises. Negative roles are extinguished as the group communicates openly about its goals, strategies, and expectations. The opinions and viewpoints of all members are encouraged and expected. From Groups to Teams Some use the terms group and team interchangeably; others distinguish between them. The major distinction between a group and a team is in members’ attitudes and level of commitment. A team is typified by a clear identity and a high level of commitment on the part of members. A variety of strategies has been used for organizing workers into teams: • A task force is generally given a single goal and a limited time to achieve it. • A quality assurance team, or quality circle, focuses on product or service quality, and projects can be either short- or long-term. • A cross-functional team brings together employees from various departments to solve a variety of prob- lems, such as productivity issues, contract estima- tions and planning, and multidepartment difficulties. • A product development team concentrates on inno- vation and the development cycle of new products, and is usually cross-functional in nature. Consider the impact of team structures, as illustrated in the organizational chart in Figure 2-2 on the next page. While chain of command is still at work in for- mal organizational relationships and responsibilities, team structures unite people from varying portions of the organization. Work teams are typically given the authority to act on their conclusions,although the level of authority varies, depending on the orga- nization and the purpose of the team. Typically, the group supervisor retains some responsi- bilities, some decisions are made completely by the team, and the rest are made jointly. Merely placing work- ers into a group does not make them a functional team. A group must go through a developmental process to begin to func- tion as a team. The four stages of team develop- ment include: 1. forming—becoming acquainted with each other and the assigned task 2. storming—dealing with conflicting per- sonalities, goals, and ideas 3. norming—devel- oping strategies and activities that promote goal achievement 4. performing—reach- ing the optimal performance level. task force a team of workers that is generally given a single goal and a limited time to achieve it quality assurance team a team that focuses on product or service quality; projects can be either short- or long-term cross-functional team a team that brings together employees from various departments to solve a variety of problems product development team usually cross–functional in nature; a group of employees who concentrate on innovation and the development cycle of new products forming stage one of team development, in which team members become acquainted with each other and the assigned task storming stage two of team development, in which team members deal with conflicting personalities, goals, and ideas norming stage three of team development, in which team members develop strategies and activities that promote goal achievement performing stage four of team development, in which team members reach the optimal performance level • Facilitator (also known as gatekeeper)—one who makes sure everyone gets to talk and be heard • Harmonizer—one who keeps tensions low • Record keeper—one who maintains records of events and activities and informs members • Reporter—one who assumes responsibility for preparing materials for submission • Leader—one who assumes a directive role © Radius Images/Jupiterimages Storming Norming Performing Forming © Cengage Learning 2010 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 31 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 31 1/3/11 8:21:28 AM 1/3/11 8:21:28 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 43.
    32 For a varietyof reasons, teams are often unable to advance through all four stages of development. Even long-term teams might never reach the optimal per- forming stage, settling instead for the acceptable per- formance of the norming stage. Research into what makes workplace teams effective indicates that training is beneficial for par- ticipants in such areas as problem solving, goal setting, conflict resolution, risk taking, active listen- ing, and recognizing the interests and achievements of others. Participants need to be able to satisfy one another’s basic needs for belonging, personal recogni- tion, and support. Team members at the performing stage of team development exhibit the following behaviors:10 • Commitment. They are focused on the mission, values, goals, and expectations of the team and the organization. • Cooperation. They have a shared sense of purpose, mutual gain, and teamwork. • Communication. They know that informa- tion must flow smoothly between top manage- ment and workers. Team members are willing to face confrontation and unpleas- antness when necessary. • Contribution. All mem- bers share their different backgrounds, skills, and abilities with the team. Teams have existed for hundreds of years through- out many countries and cul- tures. Teams are more flexible than larger organizational groupings because they can be assembled, deployed, refo- cused, and disbanded more quickly, usually in ways that enhance rather than disrupt more permanent structures and processes.Organizational changes are often necessary, however, since support must be in place for performance evaluation, recognition, com- munication, and training sys- tems. Strategies for bringing about needed change might include arranging site visits to similar organizations that already have teams, bringing in a successful team to speak to the organization, and bringing in consultants to discuss the team development process. Meeting Management M eetings are essential for communi- cation in organizations. They pre- sent opportunities to acquire and disseminate valuable information, develop skills, and make favorable impressions on colleagues, supervi- sors, and subordinates. U.S. businesses spend more money on con- ducting meetings than does any other coun- try in the world, and they also spend more O B J E C T I V E 5 Discuss aspects of effective meeting management. P a r t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s Product Development Team Employee Relations Team Anniversary Celebration Task Force Board of Directors Chief Executive Officer VP of Operations VP of Information Technology VP of Finance Networks Human Resources Accounting Finance Stockholder Relations Marketing Public Relations Communi- cations Systems Design Figure 2-2 Organizational Chart with Hierarchical and Team Structures © Cengage Learning 2010 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 32 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 32 1/3/11 8:21:29 AM 1/3/11 8:21:29 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 44.
    time in meetingsthan do people of other countries.11 International meetings are imperative for solid busi- ness reasons but are facing greater planning scrutiny because of tightening travel budgets and a recovering global economy. Workers frequently have negative attitudes toward meetings because they perceive they are a waste of time. Studies support this opinion, revealing that as much as one-third of the time spent in meetings is unproductive. Negative attitudes toward meetings can be changed when meetings are conducted properly, giving attention to correct procedures and behavior. Successful meetings don’t just happen; rather, they occur by design. Careful planning and attention to specific guidelines can help ensure the success of your meetings, whether they are conducted in a face-to-face format or electronically. Face-to-Face Meetings Face-to-face meetings continue to be the most-used meeting format in most organizations. They offer dis- tinct advantages and are appropriate in the following situations:12 ; When you need the richest nonverbal cues, includ- ing body, voice, proximity, and touch. ; When the issues are especially sensitive. ; When the participants don’t know one another. ; When establishing group rapport and relationships is crucial. ; When the participants can be in the same place at the same time. Face-to-face meetings can be enhanced with the use of various media tools such as flipcharts, handouts, and electronic slide decks. While face-to-face meetings pro- vide a rich nonverbal context and direct human con- tact, they also have certain limitations. In addition to the obvious logistical issues of schedules and distance, face-to-face meetings may be dominated by overly vocal, quick-to-speak, and high-status members. Electronic Meetings Electronic meetings allow companies to reduce travel budgets, save professional time, and minimize the environmental impact caused by travel. A variety of technologies is available to facilitate electronic meet- ings. Participants may communicate with one another through telephones, computers, or video broadcast equipment using groupware or meeting management software applications. Electronic meetings offer certain advantages. They facilitate geographically dispersed groups, because they provide the choice of meeting at different places/same time, different places/different times, same place/same time, or same place/different times. Electronic meetings also speed up meeting follow- up activities because decisions and action items can be recorded electronically. Electronic meetings also have certain limitations:13 • They cannot replace face-to-face contact, especially when group efforts are just beginning and when groups are trying to build group values, trust, and emotional ties. • They can make it harder to reach consensus, because more ideas are generated and because it might be harder to interpret the strength of other members’ commitment to their proposals. • The success of same-time meetings is dependent on all participants having excellent keyboarding skills to engage in rapid-fire, in-depth discussion. This limita- tion might be overcome as the use of voice input systems becomes more prevalent. “U.S. businesses spend more money on conducting meetings than does any other country in the world, and they also spend more time in meetings than do people of other countries.” © iStockphoto.com/porcorex C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n 33 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 33 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 33 1/3/11 8:21:33 AM 1/3/11 8:21:33 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 45.
    34 P ar t 1 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n F o u n d a t i o n s Suggestions for Effective Meetings Whether you engage in face-to-face or electronic meet- ings, observing the following guidelines can help to ensure that your meetings are productive: • Limit meeting length and frequency. Any meeting held for longer than an hour or more frequently than once a month should be scrutinized. Ask yourself whether the meeting is necessary. Perhaps the purpose can be achieved in another way, such as email, instant messaging, or telephone. • Make satisfactory arrangements. Select a date and time conve- nient for the majority of expected participants. For face-to-face meetings, plan the meeting site with consideration for appropriate seating for attendees, media equipment, temperature and lighting, and nec- essary supplies. For electronic meetings, check hard- ware and software and connectivity components. • Distribute the agenda well in advance. The agenda is a meeting outline that includes important information: date, beginning and ending times, place, topics to be discussed, and responsibilities of those involved. Having the agenda prior to the meet- ing allows participants to know what is expected of them. A sample agenda template is provided in Figure 2-3. • Encourage participation. While it is certainly easier for one person to make decisions, the quality of the decision making is often improved by involving the team. Rational decision making may begin with brainstorming, the generation of many ideas from among team members. Brainstormed ideas can then be discussed and ranked, followed by some form of voting. agenda a meeting outline that includes important information (e.g., date, beginning and ending times, place, topics to be discussed, and responsibilities of those involved) brainstorming the generation of many ideas from among team members Figure 2-3 Formal Generic Agenda for Meetings Agenda for [name of group] Meeting Prepared on [date agenda created] By [name of author of agenda] Attendees: [those invited to attend, often in alphabetical order] Date and time of meeting: Location of meeting: Subject: [major issues to be discussed or purpose of meeting] Agenda items: 1. Call to order 2. Routine business [procedural or administrative matters] (10–15 minutes) a. Approval of agenda for this meeting b. Reading and approval of minutes of last meeting c. Committee reports 3. Old business [unfinished matters from previous meeting] (15–20 minutes) a. Discussion of issue(s) carried over from previous meeting b. Issue(s) arising from decision(s) made at previous meeting 4. New business (20–25 minutes) a. Most important issue b. Next most important issue c. Other issues in decreasing order of importance d. Business from the floor not included on the agenda [only as time permits; otherwise, these issues should be addressed in the next meeting] 5. Adjournment © Cengage Learning 2010 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 34 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 34 1/3/11 8:21:34 AM 1/3/11 8:21:34 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 46.
    • Maintain order.An organized democratic process ensures that the will of the majority prevails, the minority is heard, and group goals are achieved as expeditiously as possible. Proper parliamentary procedure may be followed in formal meetings, as outlined in sources such as Robert’s Rules of Order and Jones’ Parliamentary Procedure at a Glance. For less formal meetings, a more relaxed approach may be taken to ensure that everyone has an opportunity to share in the decision-making process. • Manage conflict. In an autocratic organization, conflict might be avoided because employees are conditioned to be submissive. Such an environment, however, leads to smoldering resentment. On the other hand, conflict is a normal part of any team effort and can lead to creative discussion and supe- rior outcomes. Maintaining focus on issues and not personalities helps ensure that conflict is productive rather than destructive. • Seek consensus. While unanimous agreement on decisions is an optimal outcome, total agreement cannot always be achieved. Consensus represents the collective opinion of the group, or the informal rule that all team members can live with at least 70 percent of what is agreed upon. • Prepare thorough minutes. Minutes provide a con- cise record of meeting actions, ensure the tracking and follow-up of issues from previous meetings, and assist in the implementation of previously reached decisions. Meetings are an important management tool and are useful for idea exchange. They also provide oppor- tunities for you, as a meeting participant, to commu- nicate impressions of power and status. Knowing how to present yourself and your ideas and exhibiting knowledge about correct meeting management will assist you in your career advancement. consensus represents the collective opinion of the group, or the informal rule that all team members can live with at least 70 percent of what is agreed upon © iStockphoto.com/Todd Arena Face-to-face meetings continue to be the most-used meeting format in most organizations. C h a p t e r 2 : F o c u s i n g o n I n t e r p e r s o n a l a n d G r o u p C o m m u n i c a t i o n 35 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 35 27776_ch02_020-035.indd 35 1/3/11 8:21:36 AM 1/3/11 8:21:36 AM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 47.
    36 P ar t 2 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n A n a l y s i s In a report titled “Writing: A Ticket to Work . . . or a Ticket Out,” the National Commission on Writing reported that two-thirds of salaried employees in large companies have some writing responsibilities, and get- ting hired and promoted in many industries requires strong writing abilities. While writing is important in most managerial-level jobs, the Commission also con- cluded that one-third of employees in corporateAmerica write poorly. Knowing that effective communication is tied to the corporate bottom line and many employees can’t write well, businesses are investing $3.1 billion annually to train employees to write.1 Remedies are needed to prevent confusion, waste, errors, lost produc- tivity, and a damaged corporate image—all caused by employees, customers, and clients muddling their way through unreadable messages. As a capable communicator, you can immediately add value to your organization and set yourself apart from your peers who are struggling to articulate ideas in writing and in presentations. Communication that com- mands attention and can be understood easily is essen- tial for survival during the information explosion we are experiencing today. On the job, you will be expected to process volumes of available information and shape use- ful messages that respond to the needs of customers or clients, coworkers and supervisors, and other key busi- ness partners. Additionally, increased use of electronic communication (email, texts, instant messages, blogs, videoconferences, etc.) will require you to be technologi- cally savvy and capable of adapting the rules of good communication to the demands of emerging technology. How can you learn to plan and prepare powerful business messages? The systematic analysis process as outlined in Figure 3-1 will help you develop messages that save you and your organization valuable time and O B J E C T I V E S 1 Identify the purpose of the message and the appropriate channel. 2 Develop clear perceptions of the audience to enhance the impact of the communication and human relations. 3 Apply techniques for adapting messages to the audience, including strategies for communicating ethically and responsibly. 4 Recognize the importance of organizing a message before writing the first draft. 5 Select the appropriate message pattern (deductive or inductive) for developing messages to achieve the desired response. BCOM Communication Analysis Part 2 Chapter 3 Planning Spoken and Written Messages © iStockphoto.com/Alexandr Tovstenko 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 36 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 36 1/3/11 3:28:18 PM 1/3/11 3:28:18 PM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 48.
    37 C h ap t e r 3 : P l a n n i n g S p o k e n a n d W r i t t e n M e s s a g e s C H A P T E R 3 © Hans Neleman/Stone/Getty Images “As a capable communicator, you can immediately add value to your organization and set yourself apart from your peers who are struggling to articulate ideas in writing and in presentations. ” Figure 3-1 Process for Planning and Preparing Spoken and Written Messages STEP 1 Determine the purpose and select an appropriate channel STEP 2 Envision the audience STEP 3 Adapt the message to the audience’s needs and concerns STEP 4 Organize the message STEP* 5 Prepare the first draft STEP* 6 Revise and proofread for accuracy and desired impact © Cengage Learning 2010 *You will focus on the planning process (Steps 1–4) in this chapter; you will learn to prepare the message in Chapter 4 (Steps 5–6). 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 37 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 37 1/3/11 3:28:32 PM 1/3/11 3:28:32 PM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 49.
    P a rt 2 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n A n a l y s i s resources and portray you as a capable, energetic pro- fessional. A thorough analysis of the audience and your specific com- munication assignment will empower you to write a first draft efficiently and to revise and proofread your message for accuracy, conciseness, and appropriate tone. Step 1: Determining the Purpose and Channel T o speak or write effectively, you must think through what you are trying to say and understand it thoroughly before you begin. Ask yourself why you are prepar- ing the message and what you hope to accomplish. Is the purpose to get infor- mation, to answer a question, to accept an offer, to deny a request, to seek support for a product or idea? Condense the answers into a brief sentence that outlines the pur- pose for writing or the central idea of your message.You will use the central idea to organize your message to achieve the results you desire. The major purpose of many business messages is to have the receiver understand logical informa- tion. Informative messages are used to convey the vast amounts of information needed to complete the day-to-day operations of the business—explain instructions to employees, announce meetings and procedures, acknowledge orders, accept contracts for services, and so forth. Some messages are intended to persuade— to influence or change the attitudes or actions of the receiver. These messages include promoting a product or service and seeking support for ideas and worthy causes presented to supervisors, employees, stockhold- ers, customers or clients, and others. You will learn to prepare messages for each of these purposes. Step 2: Envisioning the Audience P erception is the part of the communication process that involves how we look at others and the world around us. It’s a natural ten- dency to perceive situations from our own limited viewpoint. We use the context of the situation and our five senses to absorb and interpret the infor- mation bombarding us in unique ways. Individual differ- ences in perception account for the varied and sometimes con- flicting reports given by eyewitnesses to the same accident. Our senses can be tricked when there is a difference in what we expect and what really is happening. For example, consider how your perception affects your ability to accurately or completely interpret an optical illusion. Perception of reality is also limited by previous expe- riences and our attitudes toward the sender of the mes- sage. We support ideas that are in line with our own and decide whether to focus on the positive or the negative of a situation. We may simply refuse to hear a message that doesn’t fit into our view of the world. O B J E C T I V E 1 Identify the purpose of the message and the appropriate channel. O B J E C T I V E 2 Develop clear perceptions of the audience to enhance the impact of the communication and human relations. © iStockphoto.com/Nicolas Loran / © iStockphoto.com/winterling / © Chapel Hill Photography se the answers brief sentence tlines the pur- r message.You our message to ness messages gical informa- to convey the d to complete iness—explain meetings and p g a situation. We may simply refuse to hear a message that doesn’t fit into our view of the world. © 38 resources and portray you as a capable, energetic pro- fessional. A thorough analysis of the audience and your specific com- munication assignment will empower you to write a first draft efficiently and to revise and proofread your message for accuracy, conciseness, and appropriate tone. Step 1: Determining the 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 38 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 38 1/3/11 3:28:39 PM 1/3/11 3:28:39 PM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 50.
    Much of theconfusion in communication is caused by differences in the sender’s and receiver’s perceptions. For example, a manager’s brief email requesting a status report on a task may come across as curt to the employ- ees. Perceptions vary between individuals with similar backgrounds, and even more so when people from dif- ferent cultures, generations, and genders communicate. Overcoming perceptual barriers is difficult but essential if you are to craft messages that meet the needs and concerns of your audience. To help you envi- sion the audience, first focus on relevant information you know about the receiver. The more familiar you are with the receiver, the easier this task will be. When communicating with an individual, you immediately recall a clear picture of the receiver—his or her physi- cal appearance, background (education, occupation, religion, culture), values, opinions, preferences, and so on. Most importantly, your knowledge of the receiver’s reaction in similar, previous experiences will aid you in anticipating how this receiver is likely to react in the current situation. Consider the following audience characteristics: • Age. A message answering an elementary-school student’s request for information from your company would not be worded the same as a message answer- ing a similar request from an adult. • Economic level. A solicitation for a business dona- tion for a charity project written to a small business owner would likely differ from one written to a representative of a major corporation. • Educational/occupational background. The tech- nical jargon and acronyms used in a financial pro- posal sent to bank loan officers may be inappropriate in a proposal sent to a group of private investors. • Needs and concerns of the receiver. Just as suc- cessful sales personnel begin by identifying the needs of the prospective buyer, an effective man- ager attempts to understand the receiver’s frame of reference as a basis for organizing the message and developing the content. • Culture. The vast cultural differences between people (e.g., language, expressions, cus- toms, values, and religion) increase the complexity of the communication process. An email containing typi- cal American expressions (e.g., “The frustration should cool down soon” and “the competition is backed to the wall”) would likely confuse a manager from a different culture. Differences in values influence communication styles and mes- sage patterns. For example, Japanese readers value the beauty and flow of words and prefer an indirect writing approach, unlike Americans who prefer clar- ity and conciseness.2 • Rapport. A sensitive message prepared for a long- time client may differ significantly from a message prepared for a newly acquired client. Emails discuss- ing expectations for completing an assignment may be briefer and more direct when sent to an employee with whom you share a strong business relationship built on mutual trust. The rapport created by previ- ous dealings with the recipient aids understanding in a current situation. • Expectations. Because accountants, lawyers, and other professionals are expected to meet high stan- dards, a message from one of them containing errors in grammar or spelling would likely cause a receiver to question the credibility of the source. You may find that envisioning an audience you know well is often such a conscious action that you may not even recognize that you are doing it. On the other hand, envisioning those you do not know well requires addi- tional effort.In these cases,simply assume an empathetic attitude toward the receiver to assist you in identifying his or her frame of reference (knowledge, feelings, and emotions). In other words, project mentally how you believe you would feel or react in a similar situation and use that information to communicate understand- ing back to the person. Consider the use (or lack) of empathy in the follow- ing workplace examples: be inappropriate ate investors. r. Just as suc- tifying the fective man- iver’s frame of e message and s between us- he © UpperCut Images/Getty Images It can be difficult to see the world as others do. C h a p t e r 3 : P l a n n i n g S p o k e n a n d W r i t t e n M e s s a g e s 39 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 39 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 39 1/3/11 3:28:47 PM 1/3/11 3:28:47 PM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 51.
    40 P ar t 2 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n A n a l y s i s Sample Message Problem Analysis Example 1: A U.S. manager’s instructions to a new employee from an Asian culture: Trying to manufacture a product with a zero fail- ure rate would be a train wreck. We have to strike the right balance between customer safety and cost efficiency. We cannot be held hostage by threats of class action lawsuits. Do you understand? • The use of expressions peculiar to U.S. environment confuse and intimidate. • Open-ended question disregards importance of saving face to a person of Asian culture. Cultural influences may prevent employee from asking questions that might indicate lack of understanding. Example 2: An excerpt from a message sent to Mr. Sandy Everret: Ms. Everett: The wireless iPod kit that you expressed an interest in is now available in at your local car dealer. This innova- tive Bluetooth technology can be demonstrated at you convience. Please call your local sales representative to schedule a appointment. • Misspelling receiver’s name, misinterpreting gender, and overlooking mechanical errors imply incompetence or carelessness and disrespect for receiver. • Omission of contact information reduces writer’s credibility and shows lack of genuine concern for sender’s needs. Taking the time and effort to obtain a strong men- tal picture of your audience through firsthand knowl- edge or your empathetic attitude before you write will enhance your message in the following ways: 1. Establishes rapport and credibility needed to build long-lasting personal and business relation- ships. Your receivers will appreciate your attempt to connect and understand their feelings. A likely outcome is mutual trust, which can greatly improve communication and people’s feelings about you, your ideas, and themselves (as shown in the discussion of the Johari Window in Chapter 2). 2. Permits you to address the receiver’s needs and concerns. Such knowledge allows you to select rel- evant content and to communicate in a suitable style. 3. Simplifies the task of organizing your message. From your knowledge of yourself and from your experiences with others, you can reasonably predict receivers’ reactions to various types of messages. To illustrate, ask yourself these questions: • Would I react favorably to a message saying my request is being granted or that a new client is genuinely pleased with a job I’d just completed? • Would I experience a feeling of disappointment when I learn that my request has been refused or that my promised pay raise is being postponed? • Would I need compelling arguments to convince me to purchase a new product or support a new company policy? Now, reread the questions as though you were the message recipient. Because you know your answers, you can predict others’ answers with some degree of accuracy. Such predictions are possible because of com- monality in human behavior. Your commitment to identifying the needs and concerns of your audience before you communicate is invaluable in today’s workplace. Organizations must focus on providing quality customer service and developing work environments supportive of talented, diverse workers. Alienating valuable customers and tal- ented employees as a result of poor audience analysis is not an option in today’s competitive environment. Step 3: Adapting the Message to the Audience A fter you have envisioned your audience, you are ready to adapt your message to fit the specific needs of your audience. Adaptations include focusing on the receiver’s point of view; communicat- ing ethically and responsibly; building and protecting good- will; using simple, con- temporary language; writing concisely; and projecting a positive, tactful tone. Focus on the Receiver’s Point of View Ideas are more interesting and appealing if they are expressed from the receiver’s viewpoint. Developing a “you attitude” rather than a “me attitude” involves thinking in terms of the other person’s interests and trying to see a problem from the other’s point of view. A letter, memo, email, or phone call reflecting a “you O B J E C T I V E 3 Apply techniques for adapting messages to the audience, including strategies for communicating ethically and responsibly. 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 40 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 40 1/3/11 3:28:50 PM 1/3/11 3:28:50 PM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 52.
    attitude” sends adirect signal of sincere concern for the receiver’s needs and interest. The use of the word you (appropriately used) con- veys to receivers a feeling that messages are specifically for them. However, if the first-person pronoun I is used frequently, especially as the subject, the sender may impress others as being self-centered—always talking about self. Compare the following examples of sender- centered and receiver-centered statements: “I”- or Sender- Centered “You”- or Receiver-Centered I want to take this opportunity to offer my congratulations on your recent promotion to regional manager Congratulations on your recent promotion to regional manager. We charge customers a 12 percent annual finance charge on past-due invoices. Customers pay a 12 percent annual finance charge only on past- due invoices. (You could be the subject in a message to a customer.) Compliments (words of deserved praise) are another effective way of increasing a receiver’s recep- tiveness to ideas that follow. Give sincere compli- ments judiciously as they can do more harm than good if paid at the wrong time, in the wrong setting, inthepresenceofthewrongpeople,orforthewrong reasons. Likewise, avoid flattery (words of unde- served praise). Although the recipient may accept your flattery as a sincere compliment, it is more likely that the recipient will interpret your unde- served praise as an attempt to seek to gain favor or special attention. Suspicion of your motive makes effective communication less likely. Communicate Ethically and Responsibly The familiar directive “with power comes responsibility” applies especially to your use of communication skills. Because business communication affects the lives of many, you must accept responsibility for using it to uphold your own personal values and your company’s standards of ethical con- duct. Before speaking or writing, use the following guidelines to help you communicate ethically and responsibly. • Is the information stated as truthfully, honestly, and fairly as possible? Good communicators recog- nize that ensuring a free flow of essential information is in the interest of the public and the organization. Merck, the manufacturer of the prescription pain reliever Vioxx, was sued by thousands of patients and patients’ families for withholding information about known heart risks associated with taking the drug.3 Similarly, failure to report the nature of his investment practices led to the arrest of the accoun- tant of Bernard Madoff, the man who admittedly cheated thousands of investors out of billions of dollars in an illegal scheme. The SEC has accused Madoff’s accountant, David Friehling, of lying to the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants rather than subject his audit work to peer review.4 Your honor, honesty, and credibility will build strong, How to Cultivate a “You Attitude” To cultivate a “you attitude,” concentrate on the following questions: • Does the message address the receiver’s major needs and concerns? • Would the receiver feel this message is receiver-centered? Is the receiver kept clearly in the picture? • Will the receiver perceive the ideas to be fair, logical, and ethical? • Are ideas expressed clearly and concisely (to avoid lost time, money, and possible embarrassment caused when messages are misunderstood)? • Does the message promote positive business relationships—even when the message is negative? For example, are please, thank you, and other courtesies used when appropriate? Are ideas stated tactfully and positively and in a manner that preserves the receiver’s self- worth and cultivates future business? • Is the message sent promptly and through the preferred channel to indicate courtesy? • Does the message reflect the high standards of a business professional: accurate and appealing document design, quality printing, and absence of misspellings and grammatical errors? 41 C h a p t e r 3 : P l a n n i n g S p o k e n a n d W r i t t e n M e s s a g e s © Radius Images/Jupiterimages 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 41 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 41 1/3/11 3:28:53 PM 1/3/11 3:28:53 PM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 53.
    42 P ar t 2 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n A n a l y s i s long-lasting relationships and lead to the long-term success of your company. Sending complete, accu- rate, and timely information regardless of whether it supports your interests will help you build credibility. • Does the message embellish or exaggerate the facts? Legal guidelines related to advertising provide clear guidance for avoiding fraud, the misrepresen- tation of products or services; however, overzeal- ous sales representatives or imaginative writers can use language skillfully to create less-than-accurate perceptions in the minds of receivers. Businesses have learned the hard way that overstating the capabilities of a product or service (promising more than can be delivered) is not good for business in the long run. Researchers are at times tempted to overstate their findings to ensure continued fund- ing or greater publicity. Eric T. Peohlman, a medical researcher, acknowledged that while at the University of Vermont he fabricated data in 17 applications for federal grants to make his work seem more promis- ing. Under a plea agreement, he was barred for life from receiving federal funding and had to pay back $180,000, as well as asking scientific journals to retract and correct 10 articles he had authored.5 While surveys indicate many job seekers believe companies expect résumé padding, companies repeat- edly report that this perception is not true. Marilee Jones, dean of admissions at Massachusetts Institute of Technology, and David Edmonson, the former CEO of Radio Shack, resigned high-profile jobs for misstating their academic records. George O’Leary stepped down five days after been named head football coach at Notre Dame, admitting he lied about receiving a master’s degree and playing college football.6 Skill in communicating persuasively will be impor- tant throughout your profession. The techniques you will read about in this text, such as those related to writing a winning résumé and application message, will be helpful as you begin your career; however, these techniques should not be used if your motive is to exploit the receiver. • Are the ideas expressed clearly and understand- ably? If a message is to be seen as honest, you must be reasonably confident that the receiver can understand it. Ethical communicators select words that convey the exact meaning intended and that are within the reader’s vocabulary. • Is your viewpoint supported with objective facts? Are facts accurately docu- mented to allow the reader to judge the credibility of the source and to give credit where credit is due? Can opinions be clearly distin- guished from facts? Have you evaluated honestly any real or perceived conflict of interest that could prevent you from preparing an unbiased message? • Are ideas stated with tact and consideration that preserves the receiver’s self-worth? The meta- phor “An arrow, once it is shot, cannot be recalled” describes the irrevocable damage caused by cruel or unkind words.7 Ego-destroying criticism, excessive anger, sarcasm, hurtful nicknames, betrayed secrets, rumors, and malicious gossip pose serious ethical problems in the workplace because they can ruin reputations, humiliate, and damage a person’s self-worth. Serious legal issues arise when negative statements are false, constituting defamation. Written defamatory remarks are referred to as libel, and similar spoken remarks are referred to as slander. If you choose to make negative statements about a person, be sure the facts in question are supported. Additionally, you’ll hone your abilities to convey neg- ative information and to handle sensitive situations in a constructive, timely manner rather than ignoring them until they are out of control. For considerate, fair, and civilized use of words, follow this simple rule: Communicate with and about others with the same kindness and fairness that you wish others to use when communicating with and about you. • Are graphics carefully designed to avoid distort- ing facts and relationships? Communicating ethi- cally involves reporting data as clearly and accurately as possible. Misleading graphics result either from the developers’ deliberate attempt to confuse the audience or from their lack of expertise in con- structing ethical graphics. libel written defamatory remarks slander spoken defamatory remarks © iStockphoto.com/Anton Vakhlachev Communication’s Golden Rule Communicate with and about others with the same kindness and fairness that you wish others to use when communicating with and about you. ing facts and relationships? Communicating ethi- cally involves reporting data as clearly and accurately as possible. Misleading graphics result either from the developers’ deliberate attempt to confuse the audience or from their lack of expertise in con- structing ethical graphics. © iStockpho Communication’s Golden Rule Communicate with and about others with the same kindness and fairness that you wish others to use when communicating with and about you. 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 42 27776_ch03_036-055.indd 42 1/3/11 3:29:04 PM 1/3/11 3:29:04 PM Copyright 2011 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. Due to electronic rights, some third party content may be suppressed from the eBook and/or eChapter(s). Editorial review has deemed that any suppressed content does not materially affect the overall learning experience. Cengage Learning reserves the right to remove additional content at any time if subsequent rights restrictions require it.
  • 54.
    Another random documentwith no related content on Scribd:
  • 55.
    Some obvious minortypographical and punctuation errors have been corrected silently. List of Illustrations: illustration numbers have been added. Illustrations numbers 33 (originally Kingfisher) and 34 (originally Carron) interchanged cf. the order of the illustrations in the text; ditto for numbers 44 (Cambria) and 45 (Marylebone), numbers 51 (Dieppe) and 52 (United Kingdom), and numbers 94 (Campania) and 95 (Mauretania). Perier and Périer have been standardised to Périer. Page 65: ... to bring up in Ramsay Bay ... has been changed to ... to bring up in Ramsey Bay .... Page 86: ſatisfying has been changed to ſatiſfying. Page 118: Konisberg has been changed to Königsberg. Page 187: Miller and Ravenhall has been changed to Miller and Ravenhill. Page 320: Dupuy de Lome has been changed to Dupuy de Lôme. Index entries changed to conform to the text: Belier to Bélier; Bernouilli to Bernoulli; Browne, Charles to Brownne, Charles; Cambia (Cunard Co.) and Cambia (L. & N.W.R.) to Cambria (Cunard Co.) and Cambria (L. & N.W.R.) (ships); Chipping Camden to Chipping Campden (entry Freeman, Mr.); Dupuy de Lome to Dupuy de Lôme; Fire- brand to Firebrand (ship); Grayson & Leadly to Grayson & Leadley; Humbolt to Humboldt (ship); Jorden, J., & Co. to Jordan, J., & Co.; Jouffrey d’Abbans to Jouffroy d’Abbans; Jumma to Jumna (ship); Liffy to Liffey (ship); Maudsley, Sons & Field to Maudslay, Sons & Field; Morisot’s “Orbis Maritimi,” to Morisotus’ “Orbis Maritimi,”; Munroe, President to Monroe, President (also moved to proper place); Prince Regent Luitpold to Prinz
  • 56.
    Regent Luitpold (ship);Rubic and Blaker to Rubie and Blaker; James Rumsey to James Rumsay (entry Moray, John); Salamon de Caus to Salomon de Caus (entry Steam-engines); Sans Pariel to Sans Pareil (ship); Shaw, Savil & Albion Co. to Shaw, Savill & Albion Co.; Winan’s cigar ship to Winans’ cigar ship.
  • 57.
    *** END OFTHE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK STEAM-SHIPS *** Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be renamed. Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. START: FULL LICENSE
  • 58.
    THE FULL PROJECTGUTENBERG LICENSE
  • 59.
    PLEASE READ THISBEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license. Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works 1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. 1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
  • 60.
    1.C. The ProjectGutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when you share it without charge with others. 1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any country other than the United States. 1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: 1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work on which the phrase “Project
  • 61.
    Gutenberg” appears, orwith which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied or distributed: This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook. 1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. 1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. 1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ License terms from this work, or any files
  • 62.
    containing a partof this work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. 1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License. 1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. 1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. 1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works provided that: • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty
  • 63.
    payments must bepaid within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.” • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works. • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of receipt of the work. • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. 1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. 1.F. 1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright
  • 64.
    law in creatingthe Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. 1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.
  • 65.
    If the secondcopy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem. 1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. 1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. 1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any Defect you cause. Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™
  • 66.
    Project Gutenberg™ issynonymous with the free distribution of electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of life. Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non- profit 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
  • 67.
    Section 4. Informationabout Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS. The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate. While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us with offers to donate. International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including checks, online payments and
  • 68.
    credit card donations.To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate. Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility: www.gutenberg.org. This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.